Lincoln Electric Na 5N Users Manual Svm131a

NA-5NF to the manual 8e62f948-c797-42fc-88ed-636f50965ff4

2015-02-09

: Lincoln-Electric Lincoln-Electric-Na-5N-Users-Manual-574577 lincoln-electric-na-5n-users-manual-574577 lincoln-electric pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 152

DownloadLincoln-Electric Lincoln-Electric-Na-5N-Users-Manual- Svm131a  Lincoln-electric-na-5n-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
SVM131-A

View Safety Info

Return to Master TOC

RETURN TO MAIN INDEX

July, 1997

NA-5
AUTOMATIC WELDING SYSTEMS
For use with the following models: NA-5N

NA-5NF
NA-5S
NA-5SF

Return to Master TOC

View Safety Info

Return to Master TOC

View Safety Info

Safety Depends on You
Lincoln arc welding and cutting
equipment is designed and built
with safety in mind. However,
your overall safety can be
increased by proper installation
... and thoughtful operation on
your part. DO NOT INSTALL,
OPERATE OR REPAIR THIS
EQUIPMENT WITHOUT READING THIS MANUAL AND THE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CONTAINED THROUGHOUT. And,
most importantly, think before
you act and be careful.

View Safety Info

Return to Master TOC

SERVICE MANUAL

World's Leader in Welding and Cutting Products

Premier Manufacturer of Industrial Motors

Sales and Service through Subsidiaries and Distributors Worldwide

22801 St. Clair Ave. Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199 U.S.A. Tel. (216) 481-8100

Return to Master TOC

i

i

SAFETY

WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGS
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents
are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
The Above For Diesel Engines

The engine exhaust from this product contains
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
The Above For Gasoline Engines

ARC WELDING CAN BE HAZARDOUS. PROTECT YOURSELF AND OTHERS FROM POSSIBLE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
KEEP CHILDREN AWAY. PACEMAKER WEARERS SHOULD CONSULT WITH THEIR DOCTOR BEFORE OPERATING.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Read and understand the following safety highlights. For additional safety information, it is strongly recommended that you purchase a copy of “Safety in Welding & Cutting - ANSI Standard Z49.1” from the American Welding Society, P.O. Box 351040,
Miami, Florida 33135 or CSA Standard W117.2-1974. A Free copy of “Arc Welding Safety” booklet E205 is available from the
Lincoln Electric Company, 22801 St. Clair Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199.

BE SURE THAT ALL INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES ARE
PERFORMED ONLY BY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUALS.

FOR ENGINE
powered equipment.
1.a. Turn the engine off before troubleshooting and maintenance
work unless the maintenance work requires it to be running.
____________________________________________________
1.b. Operate engines in open, well-ventilated
areas or vent the engine exhaust fumes
outdoors.

____________________________________________________
1.c. Do not add the fuel near an open flame welding arc or when the engine is running. Stop
the engine and allow it to cool before refueling to prevent spilled fuel from vaporizing on
contact with hot engine parts and igniting. Do
not spill fuel when filling tank. If fuel is spilled,
wipe it up and do not start engine until fumes
have been eliminated.
____________________________________________________
1.d. Keep all equipment safety guards, covers and
devices in position and in good repair.Keep
hands, hair, clothing and tools away from Vbelts, gears, fans and all other moving parts
when starting, operating or repairing equipment.
____________________________________________________

Return to Master TOC

1.h. To avoid scalding, do not remove the
radiator pressure cap when the engine is
hot.

1.e. In some cases it may be necessary to remove safety
guards to perform required maintenance. Remove
guards only when necessary and replace them when the
maintenance requiring their removal is complete.
Always use the greatest care when working near moving
parts.
___________________________________________________
1.f. Do not put your hands near the engine fan. Do not attempt to
override the governor or idler by pushing on the throttle control rods while the engine is running.
___________________________________________________
1.g. To prevent accidentally starting gasoline engines while
turning the engine or welding generator during maintenance
work, disconnect the spark plug wires, distributor cap or
magneto wire as appropriate.

ELECTRIC AND
MAGNETIC FIELDS
may be dangerous
2.a. Electric current flowing through any conductor causes
localized Electric and Magnetic Fields (EMF). Welding
current creates EMF fields around welding cables and
welding machines
2.b. EMF fields may interfere with some pacemakers, and
welders having a pacemaker should consult their physician
before welding.
2.c. Exposure to EMF fields in welding may have other health
effects which are now not known.
2.d. All welders should use the following procedures in order to
minimize exposure to EMF fields from the welding circuit:
2.d.1. Route the electrode and work cables together - Secure
them with tape when possible.
2.d.2. Never coil the electrode lead around your body.
2.d.3. Do not place your body between the electrode and
work cables. If the electrode cable is on your right
side, the work cable should also be on your right side.
2.d.4. Connect the work cable to the workpiece as close as
possible to the area being welded.
2.d.5. Do not work next to welding power source.

Mar ‘95

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

ii

ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.

ARC RAYS can burn.

3.a. The electrode and work (or ground) circuits
are electrically “hot” when the welder is on.
Do not touch these “hot” parts with your bare
skin or wet clothing. Wear dry, hole-free
gloves to insulate hands.

4.a. Use a shield with the proper filter and cover
plates to protect your eyes from sparks and
the rays of the arc when welding or observing
open arc welding. Headshield and filter lens
should conform to ANSI Z87. I standards.

3.b. Insulate yourself from work and ground using dry insulation.
Make certain the insulation is large enough to cover your full
area of physical contact with work and ground.

4.b. Use suitable clothing made from durable flame-resistant
material to protect your skin and that of your helpers from
the arc rays.

In addition to the normal safety precautions, if welding
must be performed under electrically hazardous
conditions (in damp locations or while wearing wet
clothing; on metal structures such as floors, gratings or
scaffolds; when in cramped positions such as sitting,
kneeling or lying, if there is a high risk of unavoidable or
accidental contact with the workpiece or ground) use
the following equipment:
• Semiautomatic DC Constant Voltage (Wire) Welder.
• DC Manual (Stick) Welder.
• AC Welder with Reduced Voltage Control.

4.c. Protect other nearby personnel with suitable, non-flammable
screening and/or warn them not to watch the arc nor expose
themselves to the arc rays or to hot spatter or metal.

3.c. In semiautomatic or automatic wire welding, the electrode,
electrode reel, welding head, nozzle or semiautomatic
welding gun are also electrically “hot”.
3.d. Always be sure the work cable makes a good electrical
connection with the metal being welded. The connection
should be as close as possible to the area being welded.
3.e. Ground the work or metal to be welded to a good electrical
(earth) ground.
3.f. Maintain the electrode holder, work clamp, welding cable and
welding machine in good, safe operating condition. Replace
damaged insulation.

Return to Master TOC

ii

SAFETY

3.g. Never dip the electrode in water for cooling.
3.h. Never simultaneously touch electrically “hot” parts of
electrode holders connected to two welders because voltage
between the two can be the total of the open circuit voltage
of both welders.
3.i. When working above floor level, use a safety belt to protect
yourself from a fall should you get a shock.
3.j. Also see Items 6.c. and 8.

FUMES AND GASES
can be dangerous.
5.a. Welding may produce fumes and gases
hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these
fumes and gases.When welding, keep
your head out of the fume. Use enough
ventilation and/or exhaust at the arc to keep
fumes and gases away from the breathing zone. When
welding with electrodes which require special
ventilation such as stainless or hard facing (see
instructions on container or MSDS) or on lead or
cadmium plated steel and other metals or coatings
which produce highly toxic fumes, keep exposure as
low as possible and below Threshold Limit Values (TLV)
using local exhaust or mechanical ventilation. In
confined spaces or in some circumstances, outdoors, a
respirator may be required. Additional precautions are
also required when welding on galvanized steel.
5.b. Do not weld in locations near chlorinated hydrocarbon vapors
coming from degreasing, cleaning or spraying operations.
The heat and rays of the arc can react with solvent vapors to
form phosgene, a highly toxic gas, and other irritating
products.
5.c. Shielding gases used for arc welding can displace air and
cause injury or death. Always use enough ventilation,
especially in confined areas, to insure breathing air is safe.
5.d. Read and understand the manufacturer’s instructions for this
equipment and the consumables to be used, including the
material safety data sheet (MSDS) and follow your
employer’s safety practices. MSDS forms are available from
your welding distributor or from the manufacturer.

Return to Master TOC

5.e. Also see item 1.b.

Mar ‘95

Return to Master TOC

iii

WELDING SPARKS can
cause fire or explosion.

6.a. Remove fire hazards from the welding area.
If this is not possible, cover them to prevent
the welding sparks from starting a fire.
Remember that welding sparks and hot
materials from welding can easily go through small cracks
and openings to adjacent areas. Avoid welding near
hydraulic lines. Have a fire extinguisher readily available.
6.b. Where compressed gases are to be used at the job site,
special precautions should be used to prevent hazardous
situations. Refer to “Safety in Welding and Cutting” (ANSI
Standard Z49.1) and the operating information for the
equipment being used.

Return to Master TOC

6.c. When not welding, make certain no part of the electrode
circuit is touching the work or ground. Accidental contact can
cause overheating and create a fire hazard.
6.d. Do not heat, cut or weld tanks, drums or containers until the
proper steps have been taken to insure that such procedures
will not cause flammable or toxic vapors from substances
inside. They can cause an explosion even though they have
been “cleaned”. For information, purchase “Recommended
Safe Practices for the Preparation for Welding and Cutting of
Containers and Piping That Have Held Hazardous
Substances”, AWS F4.1 from the American Welding Society
(see address above).
6.e. Vent hollow castings or containers before heating, cutting or
welding. They may explode.
6.f. Sparks and spatter are thrown from the welding arc. Wear oil
free protective garments such as leather gloves, heavy shirt,
cuffless trousers, high shoes and a cap over your hair. Wear
ear plugs when welding out of position or in confined places.
Always wear safety glasses with side shields when in a
welding area.

Return to Master TOC

iii

SAFETY

6.g. Connect the work cable to the work as close to the welding
area as practical. Work cables connected to the building
framework or other locations away from the welding area
increase the possibility of the welding current passing
through lifting chains, crane cables or other alternate circuits.
This can create fire hazards or overheat lifting chains or
cables until they fail.
6.h. Also see item 1.c.

CYLINDER may explode
if damaged.
7.a. Use only compressed gas cylinders
containing the correct shielding gas for the
process used and properly operating
regulators designed for the gas and
pressure used. All hoses, fittings, etc. should be suitable for
the application and maintained in good condition.
7.b. Always keep cylinders in an upright position securely
chained to an undercarriage or fixed support.
7.c. Cylinders should be located:
• Away from areas where they may be struck or subjected to
physical damage.
• A safe distance from arc welding or cutting operations and
any other source of heat, sparks, or flame.
7.d. Never allow the electrode, electrode holder or any other
electrically “hot” parts to touch a cylinder.
7.e. Keep your head and face away from the cylinder valve outlet
when opening the cylinder valve.
7.f. Valve protection caps should always be in place and hand
tight except when the cylinder is in use or connected for
use.
7.g. Read and follow the instructions on compressed gas
cylinders, associated equipment, and CGA publication P-l,
“Precautions for Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in
Cylinders,” available from the Compressed Gas Association
1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.

FOR ELECTRICALLY
powered equipment.
8.a. Turn off input power using the disconnect
switch at the fuse box before working on
the equipment.
8.b. Install equipment in accordance with the U.S. National
Electrical Code, all local codes and the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
8.c. Ground the equipment in accordance with the U.S. National
Electrical Code and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Return to Master TOC

Mar ‘95

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

iv

iv

SAFETY
PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ

Pour votre propre protection lire et observer toutes les instructions
et les précautions de sûreté specifiques qui parraissent dans ce
manuel aussi bien que les précautions de sûreté générales suivantes:
Sûreté Pour Soudage A L’Arc
1. Protegez-vous contre la secousse électrique:
a. Les circuits à l’électrode et à la piéce sont sous tension
quand la machine à souder est en marche. Eviter
toujours tout contact entre les parties sous tension et
la peau nue ou les vétements mouillés. Porter des
gants secs et sans trous pour isoler les mains.
b. Faire trés attention de bien s’isoler de la masse quand
on soude dans des endroits humides, ou sur un
plancher metallique ou des grilles metalliques,
principalement dans les positions assis ou couché
pour lesquelles une grande partie du corps peut être
en contact avec la masse.
c. Maintenir le por te-électrode, la pince de masse, le
câble de soudage et la machine à souder en bon et sûr
état defonctionnement.
d. Ne jamais plonger le porte-électrode dans l’eau pour
le refroidir.
e. Ne jamais toucher simultanément les par ties sous
tension des por te-électrodes connectés à deux
machines à souder parce que la tension entre les deux
pinces peut être le total de la tension à vide des deux
machines.
f. Si on utilise la machine à souder comme une source
de courant pour soudage semi-automatique, ces
precautions pour le porte-électrode s’applicuent aussi
au pistolet de soudage.
2. Dans le cas de travail au dessus du niveau du sol, se protéger
contre les chutes dans le cas ou on recoit un choc. Ne jamais
enrouler le câble-électrode autour de n’importe quelle partie
du corps.
3. Un coup d’arc peut être plus sévère qu’un coup de soliel,
donc:
a. Utiliser un bon masque avec un verre filtrant approprié
ainsi qu’un verre blanc afin de se protéger les yeux du rayonnement de l’arc et des projections quand on soude ou
quand on regarde l’arc.
b. Porter des vêtements convenables afin de protéger la
peau de soudeur et des aides contre le rayonnement de
l‘arc.
c. Protéger l’autre personnel travaillant à proximité au
soudage à l’aide d’écrans appropriés et non-inflammables.
4. Des gouttes de laitier en fusion sont émises de l’arc de
soudage. Se protéger avec des vêtements de protection libres
de l’huile, tels que les gants en cuir, chemise épaisse, pantalons sans revers, et chaussures montantes.

5. Toujours porter des lunettes de sécurité dans la zone de
soudage. Utiliser des lunettes avec écrans lateraux dans les
zones où l’on pique le laitier.
6. Eloigner les matériaux inflammables ou les recouvrir afin
de prévenir tout risque d’incendie dû aux étincelles.
7. Quand on ne soude pas, poser la pince à une endroit isolé
de la masse. Un court-circuit accidental peut provoquer un
échauffement et un risque d’incendie.
8. S’assurer que la masse est connectée le plus prés possible
de la zone de travail qu’il est pratique de le faire. Si on
place la masse sur la charpente de la construction ou
d’autres endroits éloignés de la zone de travail, on
augmente le risque de voir passer le courant de soudage
par les chaines de levage, câbles de grue, ou autres
circuits. Cela peut provoquer des risques d’incendie ou
d’echauffement des chaines et des câbles jusqu’à ce qu’ils
se rompent.
9. Assurer une ventilation suffisante dans la zone de soudage.
Ceci est particuliérement important pour le soudage de
tôles galvanisées plombées, ou cadmiées ou tout autre
métal qui produit des fumeés toxiques.
10. Ne pas souder en présence de vapeurs de chlore provenant
d’opérations de dégraissage, nettoyage ou pistolage. La
chaleur ou les rayons de l’arc peuvent réagir avec les
vapeurs du solvant pour produire du phosgéne (gas
fortement toxique) ou autres produits irritants.
11. Pour obtenir de plus amples renseignements sur la sûreté,
voir le code “Code for safety in welding and cutting” CSA
Standard W 117.2-1974.

PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ POUR
LES MACHINES À SOUDER À
TRANSFORMATEUR ET À
REDRESSEUR
1. Relier à la terre le chassis du poste conformement au code de
l’électricité et aux recommendations du fabricant. Le dispositif
de montage ou la piece à souder doit être branché à une
bonne mise à la terre.
2. Autant que possible, I’installation et l’entretien du poste seront
effectués par un électricien qualifié.
3. Avant de faires des travaux à l’interieur de poste, la debrancher à l’interrupteur à la boite de fusibles.
4. Garder tous les couvercles et dispositifs de sûreté à leur
place.

Mar. ‘93

RETURN TO MAIN INDEX

v

v

MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR ALL SECTIONS
Safety

...................................................

Page
i-iv

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section A
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
Electrode Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Power Source Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator’s Instructions . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and Their Functions . . . . .
Setup Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Stopping Sequences . .
Setting Travel Starting and Stopping
Voltage Control Response . . . . . . .
Automatic Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Start Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security of Weld Procedure Settings

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. Section B
.
B-2
.
B-2
.
B-3
.
B-4
.
B-5
.
B-6
.
B-9
.
B-10
.
B-11
.
B-12

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section C
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
Listing of Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
Maintenance . . . . . .
Control Box . . . .
Welding Head . .
Optional Features

....
....
....
...

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. Section D
.
D-2
.
D-3
.
D-6

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section E
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-2
Input Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-2
Power and Voltage Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
Control, Logic and Procedure Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-4
Optional start, Crater Fill and Weld Timer Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-5
SCR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section F
Electrical Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section G
Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NA-5

P-135

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

vi

NOTES

NA-5

vi

Section A

TABLE OF CONTENTS
- INSTALLATION SECTION -

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Head Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Box to Welding Head Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply to Control Box Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrode Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Source Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A.8 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a DC-600 . . . . . . .
Figure A.9 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a DC-650 Pro . . . .
Figure A.10 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a R3S-400, -600
or -800 with no Line Voltage Compensator (Obsolete) . . .
Figure A.11 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a SAM-400 Motor
Generator or Engine Welder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A.12 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a SAM-650
Engine Welder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A.13 — Connection of NA-5 to DC-1000 or DC-1500 .
Figure A.14 — Connection of NA-5 to DC-400 or CV-400 . . .

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Section A

NA-5

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. Section A
.
A-2
.
A-4
.
A-4
.
A-4
.
A-5
.
A-6
.
A-6
.
A-6
.
A-7
.
A-8
.
A-8
.
A-9
.
A-10

...

A-11

...

A-12

...
...
...

A-13
A-14
A-15

A-2

INSTALLATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – NA-5
MINIMUM ELECTRICAL INPUT REQUIREMENTS
115 VAC @ 3 amps 50/60 Hz power
REQUIRED WELDING POWER SOURCE
NA-5

DC Constant Voltage
WIRE FEED SPEED and GEAR RATIOS

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

GEAR RATIO

FEED SPEED RANGE
in./min (m/min)

MAX. WIRE SIZE in. (mm)
CORED WIRE
SOLID WIRE

21:1

100 - 2070 (2.54 - 52.6)

0.052 (1.3)

0.052 (1.3)

57:1

38 - 7.78 (0.96 - 19.8)

3/32 (2.4)

1/16 (1.6)

95:1

22 - 456 (0.56 - 11.6)

5/32 (4.0)

1/8 (3.2)

142:1

15 - 300 (0.38 - 7.62)

5/32 (4.0)

7/32 (5.6)

HEIGHT
in. (mm)

WEIGHT
lbs (kg)

15.05 (382)

30 (13)

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
MODEL

LENGTH
in. (mm)

WIDTH
in. (mm)

NA-5 Control Box

9.02 (229)

NA-5

17.87 (454)

FIGURE A.1 – BASIC CONTROL AND WIRE DRIVE SYSTEM.
CONTROL BOX

HEAD MOUNTING PARTS
(WITH INSULATION
AND HARDWARE)
CONTROL
CABLE
TO
POWER
SOURCE

WIRE
STRAIGHTENER

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

TACHOMETER
CABLE
4 FT (1.2 M) CABLE
(DRIVE MOTOR TO
CONTROL BOX)

Return to Section TOC

A-3

INSTALLATION

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-3

MOTOR

4 FT (1.2 M) ELECTRODE CABLES
[(TWO 4/0) CONTACT ASSEMBLY
TO CONTROL BOX]

CROSS
SEAM
ADJUSTER

GEAR BOX
CONTACT
ASSEMBLY
(OPTIONAL)

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-4

MECHANICAL
INSTALLATION

1. Align the mounting holes in adapter
plate M-13945 to the holes in the
travel carriage.
2. Install four hex head screws through
the adapter plate and into the travel
carriage.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.

Return to Master TOC

• Turn off input power to
the welding power source
using the disconnect
switch before working on
this equipment.
Return to Section TOC

A-4

INSTALLATION

INTRODUCTION
This section covers the basic requirements to
install the control box and welding head
shown in Figure A.1. This section will give
you mounting hole alignments, component
mounting clearances, and any special
instructions or precautions that must be followed when installing the control box and
mounting head.

3. Secure the control box to the adapter
plate with four lock washers and four
bolts, two from the bottom and two
from the back.
Before mounting the control box onto a
fixture, you must provide mounting holes in
the fixture per the measurements provided
in Figure A.3 or dimension print S16717.
When placing the mounting holes, ensure
the controls and meters are convenient to
the operator.
FIGURE A.2 – CONTROL BOX
CARRIAGE MOUNTING.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

CONTROL BOX INSTALLATION
The control box can be mounted either on
the standard travel carriage or on a separate
fixture. It is electrically grounded by a lead
in the input cable assembly.
To install the control box on the standard
travel carriage, use mounting kit T14469 and
perform the following steps. Also refer to
Figure A.2.

NA-5

ADAPTER
PLATE
TRAVEL
CARRIAGE
CONTROL
BOX

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-5

To install the control box on a fixture,
perform the following steps and refer to
Figure A.3.
1. Align the mounting holes on the back
and/or bottom of the control box with
the holes you put in the fixture
according to the measurements
provided in Figure A.3.

Return to Master TOC

2. Secure the control box to the fixture
using lock washers and hex head
screws at each of the mounting holes.

Return to Section TOC

A-5

INSTALLATION

FIGURE A.3 – CONTROL BOX
FIXTURE MOUNTING.
VIEW FROM BACK
0.28 (7.11) SLOTS
4 PLACES

0.41
(10.41)

0.562 DIA (14.27)
2 HOLES
12.75
(323.85)

1.34
(34.04)
1.71
(43.43)

13.77
(349.76)

WELDING HEAD INSTALLATION
The welding head can be mounted either
with the standard head mounting hardware
or with the horizontal head and/or vertical lift
adjusters. Design the installation of your
welding head so it meets the adjustability
requirements of your welding application.
Refer to Section C, Accessories, for more
information regarding the adjustable
mounting hardware.
The welding head and electrode are
electrically “hot” when welding. They must
be insulated from ground.
Standard head mounting hardware and
insulation are shipped with the NA-5
welding head. If you are mounting the
welding head on a separate fixture, provide
the mounting holes for the standard head
mount as specified in Figure A.4. For best
arc striking, use a rigid mounting that
prevents the head from moving when the
electrode strikes the work.
FIGURE A.4 – WELDING HEAD
MOUNTING HOLES.

12.00
(304.8)

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

0.531 DIA.
(13.49)
1.09
(27.68)

1/4-20
THREAD HOLES

0.43
(10.92)
4.265
(108.33)

12.00
(304.8)

3.50
(88.9)
Return to Master TOC

2.62
(66.55)

VIEW FROM BOTTOM

1.71
(43.43)

Return to Section TOC

2.88
(73.15)

APPROXIMATE
INSULATOR
SIZE

1/4-20 THREAD HOLES
FRONT
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
WITH MILLIMETERS IN
PARENTHESES.

NA-5

4.5
(114.30)
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
WITH MILLIMETERS IN
PARENTHESES.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-6

When mounting the welding head to the
standard travel carriage, (see 305-B sec.
T2.2.4) mount it so only a minimum of
overhang weight exists. Mount the head so
it stays within the dimension shown in Figure
A.5.
FIGURE A.5 – MOUNT TO CARRIAGE
OVERHANG DIMENSION.

350 volt-amperes of 115 VAC 50/60 Hz
power is required for the wire feed motor and
controls. Another 250 volt-amperes may be
required depending on the travel circuit.

If the 4 ft (1.2 m) cables are not sufficient,
install a K335 or K338 control to head
extension cable of the length ordered [up to
30 ft (9.1 m)]. The K335, for the NA-5S
head, includes motor, tachometer and flux
hopper lead extensions with polarized plugs
on each end, and electrode cables. The
K338 for the NA-5N, NF, and SF heads is
the same as the K335 without the flux
hopper lead extension.

ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.
• Do not touch electrically
live parts such as output
terminals or internal
wiring.

Return to Master TOC

INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS

All welding heads include a 4 ft (1.2 m)
motor cable and motor tachometer cable.
Insert the plugs on these cables into the
matching receptacles on the side of the
control box.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

nection diagrams for connecting automatic
welding systems to various welding power
sources.

CONTROL BOX TO WELDING
HEAD CONNECTIONS

19 IN.
(483 MM)

Return to Section TOC

A-6

INSTALLATION

This section provides information on proper
wiring procedures for the NA-5 welding system. This section also provides basic con-

NA-5

The NA-5N and NA-5S also include two 4 ft
(1.2 m) lengths of electrode cable. Bolt the
terminals at one end of the the cable pair to
the wire contact assembly and the terminals
at the other end to the electrode leads on the
power source to control cable assembly.
Properly insulate the bolted connection.
When the K335 or K338 extension cables are
used between the controls and heads, the 4 ft
(1.2 m) lengths of electrode cable are not
used. If currents or duty cycles higher than
1000 amps at 80% duty cycle will be used,
add additional electrode cable per Table A.1.
TABLE A.1
80% Duty Cycle
Below 1000 amps

Two 4/0

1000 to 1300 amps Three 4/0
1300 to 1500 amps Four 4/0

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-7

INSTALLATION
The “F” models do not include the 4 ft (1.2
m) lengths of electrode cable as standard.
If you are not using a K335 or K338 extension cable for the NA-5NF or NA-5SF, order
an appropriate length of the needed electrode cable. Connect it between the wire
contact assembly and the control cable
assembly as described above.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL
BOX CONNECTIONS
At the NA-5 control box, in order to activate
the NA-5 weld current sensing switch, the
electrode cables of the control cable
assembly must be placed under the clamp
bar on the left-hand side of the control box,
as shown in Figure A.6. This is required
for proper operation of the reed switch.
The nuts holding the clamp bar in place
need only to be pulled up snug. Do not
overtighten. If a carriage is used, the
electrode cables should also be clamped
to it with the cable clamp supplied on the
carriage. Do not clamp the control cable
under the travel carriage clamp but route it
over its top.

Return to Master TOC

CLAMP
BAR

Insert the polarized connector of the K215
or K597* control cable into the matching
receptacle on the side of the control box.
With the power source off, connect the
control cable assembly to the power
source as follows:
1. If using the multi-process power
source (SAM, SA-800, SAF-600,
DC-400, DC-600, DC-1000, or DC1500 types), be sure it is properly set
for the welding process being used
per the connection diagram (Figures
A.8 to A.14).
2. Connect the K215 control cable
leads to the power source terminal
strip exactly as specified on the
connection diagram.* Include all
jumpers on the terminal strips as
shown on the diagram. Do not put
on any other jumpers. If currents or
duty cycles higher than 1000 amps
at 80% duty cycle will be used, add
additional electrode cables to the
K215 assembly per Table A.1.
3 Depending on the power source and
the process to be used, the jumpers
on the NA-5 voltage board may have
to be changed. As shipped, the
NA-5 is connected for use with the
DC-400, DC-600, DC-1000, and
DC-1500 type power sources. For
other power sources, refer to the
appropriate connection diagram and
to IM305 Sec. T3.6.
4. Connect work leads of sufficient size
and length per Table A.1. between
the “To Work” stud on the power
source and the work. Be sure the
connection to the work makes a tight
and clean metal-to-metal contact.

FROM
POWER
SOURCE

*The K597 cable assembly has a 14-pin MS-type
connector for use with later model Lincoln CV power
sources.

TO
WELDING
HEAD
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

FIGURE A.6 – CONTROL BOX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.

A-7

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-8

ELECTRODE POLARITY

ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.
• Turn off input power to
the welding power
source
using
the
disconnect
switch
before working on this
equipment.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

The polarity of the NA-5 control circuit is
shipped connected for electrode positive. If
electrode negative is required, two leads
inside the NA-5 control must be reversed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Turn off the input power to the NA-5
control box by turning off the welding
power source.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

2. Open the control box door and locate
the terminal strips on the back of the
control box in the lower left-hand
corner as shown in Figure A.7.

Return to Section TOC

FIGURE A.7 – TERMINAL STRIP
LOCATION.

WARNING

Polarity is changed at the power source.

Return to Section TOC

A-8

INSTALLATION

3. On the right end of the lower terminal
strip, interchange the black and white
leads going to the terminals marked
(+) and (-). The black lead (#67)
must be connected to the same
polarity as the electrode welding lead;
i.e. if the electrode is positive,
connect the black lead to the (+)
terminal on the terminal strip. The
white lead (#21) is connected to the
opposite polarity terminal.

NA-5

TERMINAL
STRIPS

POWER SOURCE
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
The following section contains the wiring
diagrams necessary to connect the
applicable power source to the control box.
If there is no diagram, refer to power source
manual.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.
• Turn off input power to
the welding power
source
using
the
disconnect
switch
before working on this
equipment.

INSTALLATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-9

A-9

FIGURE A.8 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A DC-600.

P
TO NA-5 INPUT
CABLE PLUG
B
.A.

NOTE:

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

A

P

DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE.
TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE
ELECTRODE AND WORK CABLES AT THE POWER SOURCE
AND POSITON THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO PROPER
POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED
NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.

CONNECT TO CABLES FROM NA-5
WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY
B
CONNECT
TO WORK
ALL CODES:
TURN OFF INPUT POWER
ADJUST THE POWER SOURCE: DC-600:
1. CONNECT ELECTRODE CABLES TO TERMINAL OF DESIRED POLARITY.
2. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO SAME POLARITY AS THE ELECTRODE CABLE
CONNECTION.
3. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO "REMOTE".
4. SET MODE SWITCH TO THE DESIRED POSITION FOR THE PROCESS TO BE USED.

DC-600 CODES 8046-8200:
FOR SUB ARC:
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV SUB ARC.
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M".

DC-600 CODES 8000-8045:
FOR SUB ARC:
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV SUB ARC.
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M" AND BLUE
LEAD IS CONNECTED TO "W".

FOR NR-203 ELECTRODES:
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "I".

FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES EXCEPT NR-302 AND NR-203 ELECTRODES:
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M" AND BLUE
LEAD IS CONNECTED TO "W".

FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES EXCEPT MR-203 ELECTRODES:
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M".

DC-600 CODES ABOVE 8200:
FOR SUB ARC:
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV SUB ARC.
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:
2. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.

FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE WITH NA-5, DC-600'S WITH CODES 8288 AND
ABOVE ARE PREFERRED. FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS,
SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.

FOR NR-203 AND NR-302 ELECTRODES:
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "I"
AND BLUE LEAD IS CONNECTED TO "S".

N.A. ON EARLIER DC-600'S, #67 TERMINAL WAS ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586 - [ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE SENSING WORK
LEAD IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION
TO THE WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER
SOURCE MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT
LEAD #77 TO #77 ON TERMINAL STRIP.
N.G. THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD MUST BE CONNECTED AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S". CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".
N.H. CONNECT A JUMPER FROM "N" TO "P". THERE IS NO NPS TERMINAL STRIP ON DC-600 CODES ABOVE 8200.
N.J. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

NA-5

A-10

INSTALLATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-10

FIGURE A.9 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A DC-650 PRO

P

P

CONTROL
CABLE

P

6

TO NA-5 INPUT
CABLE PLUG

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

TO NA-5 INPUT
CABLE PLUG

A

CONNECT TO CABLES FROM
NA-5 WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY

A
CONNECT TO CABLES FROM NA-5
WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY

R

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

CONNECT
TO WORK

NOTE: ABOVE DIAGRAMS SHOW ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE
AND WORK CABLES AT THE POWER SOURCE AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON THE POWER SOURCE TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO
NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.

DC650 PRO POWER SOURCE SETTINGS
1. TURN OFF INPUT POWER.
2. CONNECT ELECTRODE CABLES TO TERMINALS OF DESIRED POLARITY.
3. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO SAME POLARITY AS ELECTRODE CABLE CONNECTION.
4. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO REMOTE.
5. SET MODE SWITCH TO DESIRED POSITION FOR THE PROCESS TO BE USED.
6. CONNECT NEGATIVE OUTPUT CABLES TO MATCH MODE SWITCH SETTING.
N.A. WELDING CABLES MUST BE SIZED FOR CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF APPLICATION.
N.B. EXTEND LEAD #21A BY REMOVING LEAD #21A FROM THE TERMINAL STRIP AND CONNECTING IT TO A #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR
THE INSTALLATION.
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING A #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR INSTALLATION.
N.D. CONNECT EXTENDED LEAD DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO THE WORK PIECE. FOR
CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.
N.E. TAPE UP CONNECTION.
N.F. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.
N.G. CONNECT NEGATIVE OUTPUT CABLES TO STUDS TO MATCH DC650 PRO MODE SWITCH SETTING.
N.H. THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD MUST BE CONNECTED AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S", CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".
N.J. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE, CONNECT LEAD #75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #76 ON THE TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT
LEAD #77 TO #77 ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.
N.K. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP.

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-11

A-11

INSTALLATION
FIGURE A.10 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A R3S-400, -600, OR -800
WITH NO LINE VOLTAGE COMPENSATOR (OBSOLETE).

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

B
B

B
POSITIVE

NOTE: ABOVE DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE AND WORK CABLES AT THE
POWER SOURCE AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL
BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.

R3S POWER SOURCE SETTINGS
TURN POWER SOURCE OFF.
FOR ALL PROCESSES:
1. CONNECT ELECTRODE CABLE TO TERMINAL OF DESIRED POLARITY.
2. SET THE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE SAME POLARITY AS THE ELECTRODE
CABLE CONNECTION.
3. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO REMOTE.
4. INSTALL VOLTAGE TRIANGLE IN A POSITION AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO
THE DESIRED ARC VOLTAGE.

NA-5 SETTINGS
FOR SUB ARC:
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "S".
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "F".
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.
N.A. ADD JUMPER FROM #75 TO #76, USING INSULATED COPPER WIRE.
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S -16586 [ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD
IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE, KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO THE
WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED
, NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER SOURCE
MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #77 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT
LEAD #77 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP, AND ADD JUMPER PER N.A.
N.G. ON EARLIER R3S MACHINES, #67 AND #1 TERMINALS WERE ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.
N.H. THE UPPER TERMINAL STRIP (#75, #76, #77) WAS NOT PRESENT ON EARLY R3S MACHINES. THOSE MACHINES ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE NA-5 SINCE THERE
CAN BE NO ADJUSTMENT OF VOLTAGE BY THE NA-5.
N.J. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

A-12

A-12

INSTALLATION
FIGURE A.11 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A SAM-400 MOTOR
GENERATOR OR ENGINE WELDER.

BOLT TO CABLES
FROM NA-5
WIRE CONTACT
ASSEMBLY

P
N.B.

N.B.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

NOTE: TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR
REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.
SAM POWER SOURCE SETTINGS

NA-5 SETTINGS

TURN POWER SOURCE OFF.

FOR SUB ARC:
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "S".
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".

FOR SUB ARC:
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE VARIABLE VOLTAGE
POSITION OF THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE PROCESS BEING USED.
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 7 AND THE
CURRENT CONTROL TO 500.
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE
POSITION OF THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE PROCESS BEING USED.
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 5.

FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "F".
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".

FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.

N.A. REMOVE SAM PORTABLE FIELD CONTROL AND CONNECT NA-5 CONTROL CABLE.
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586-[ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD
IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE, KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO
WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED
, NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER SOURCE
MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEADS #75 AND #77 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP.
N.G. ON EARLIER SAM MACHINES, #1 TERMINAL WAS ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.
N.H. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

NA-5

INSTALLATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-13

A-13

FIGURE A.12 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A SAM-650 ENGINE WELDER.

POWER SOURCE

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

TO NA-5 INPUT
CABLE PLUG

NOTE: TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, AND
POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO
PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5
OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED
NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.
BOLT TO CABLES
FROM NA-5
WIRE CONTACT
ASSEMBLY

"TAP"

P
P

P

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

..

SAM POWER SOURCE SETTINGS

NA-5 SETTINGS

TURN POWER SOURCE OFF.

FOR SUB ARC:
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "S".
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".

FOR SUB ARC:
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE
PROCESS BEING USED.
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 7.
4. CONNECT THE TAP CABLE TO THE "300-575, MAX, SLOPE" STUD.
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE
PROCESS BEING USED.
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 5.
4. CONNECT THE TAP CABLE TO THE "450-MAX, MED SLOPE" STUD.

FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "F".
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".

FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.

N.A. REMOVE SAM PORTABLE FIELD CONTROL AND CONNECT NA-5 CONTROL CABLE.
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586- [ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK
LEAD IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE, KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION
TO THE WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER
SOURCE MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEADS #75 AND #77 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP.
N.G. ON EARLIER SAM MACHINES, #1 TERMINAL WAS ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.
N.H. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-14

A-14

INSTALLATION
FIGURE A.13 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 TO DC-1000 OR DC-1500.

INPUT CABLE PLUG

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

POWER SOURCE

CONTROL
CABLE

P

BOLT TO CABLES FROM
NA-5 WIRE CONTACT
ASSEMBLY

CONNECT TO WORK

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

THE DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE AND WORK LEADS AT THE
POWER SOURCE, POSITION THE POSITIVE-NEGATIVE SWITCH ON THE POWER SOURCE TO CORRESPOND TO THE POLARITY OF THE ELECTRODE CABLE CONNECTION.
REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.
N.A. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.
N.B. EXTEND LEAD 21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586-[ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD
IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO
WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.
N.C. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.
N.D. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUND LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER SOURCE
MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
N.E. IF USING AN OLDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL CABLE WITH LEADS 75, 76, 77; CONNECT LEAD 75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #74 ON TERMINAL
STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #77 TO #73 ON TERMINAL STRIP.
N.F. CONNECT THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S". CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".
N.G. SET THE DC-1000 OR DC-1500 CONTROLS AS FOLLOWS: SET THE CONTROL SWITCH TO "OUTPUT CONTROL REMOTE".
FOR SUBMERGED ARC PROCESSES, SET THE MODE SWITCH TO "C.V. SUBMERGED ARC". FOR OPEN ARC PROCESSES, SET THE MODE
SWITCH TO "C.V. INNERSHIELD"
N.H. FOR PROPER OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLE MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.
N.J. TERMINALS #73 AND #74 WERE NOT PRESENT ON DC-1500 MACHINES BELOW CODE 8294. THESE EARLIER CODE MACHINES ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR
USE WITH THE NA-5.
N.K. ALTERNATIVE 500 AMP POSITIVE TERMINAL CONNECTION PROVIDED ON DC-1000 MODELS ABOVE CODE 9500 ONLY.
N.L. ALTERNATE SUBMERGED ARC MODE AVAILABLE FOR IMPROVED ARC STABILITY IN HIGH CURRENT, LARGE PUDDLE, SLOW TRAVEL PROCEDURES BY MAKING
SPECIAL CONNECTIONS ON BOTH DC-1500 AND NA-5.
ON DC-1500 CONTROL BOARD (G-1530-2 AND SUPERSEDING) REMOVE RED AND BLUE JUMPERS FROM "FR" PINS AND RECONNECT TO CORRESPONDING "SR" PINS.
ON NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD (G-1556-1 AND SUPERSEDING) WHITE JUMPER MUST BE CONNECTED TO PIN "D".
NA-5 PIN "D" CONNECTION MAY ALSO BE USED FOR SOME PROCEDURES ON DC-1500 WITHOUT CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS, DC-1500 WITH CONTROL BOARD
JUMPERS ON "FR" PINS OR DC-1000.

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-15

A-15

INSTALLATION
FIGURE A.14 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 TO DC-400 OR CV-400.

POWER SOURCE

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

TO NA-5 INPUT CABLE PLUG
C
B
A
32
31
2
4
GND

N.H.

N.E.
CONTROL
CABLE
N.D. AND N.H.

21
POSITIVE

NEGATIVE

N.D.
N.B. AND N.C.
BOLT TO CABLES FROM NA-5
WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY

N.A.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

CONNECT TO WORK
THE DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE AND WORK LEADS AT THE
POWER SOURCE AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE (IF EQUIPPED), TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED
NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS. ALSO REFER TO NOTE N.H.
FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.
N.A. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.
N.B. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 AWG OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586- [LENGTH] REMOTE
VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE
FROM THE WELDING WORK LEAD CIRCUIT AND CONNECTION. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED TO THE WELDING
WORK LEAD. (IF THE LENGTH OF WORK LEAD CIRCUIT IS SHORT, AND CONNECTIONS CAN BE EXPECTED TO BE RELIABLE, THEN CONTROL CABLE
LEAD #21 DOES NOT NEED TO BE EXTENDED AND CAN BE DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO TERMINAL #21 ON THE TERMINAL STRIP. NOTE THAT THIS IS
NOT THE PREFERRED CONNECTION BECAUSE IT ADDS ERROR TO THE NA-5 VOLTMETER READING.)
N.C. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.
N.D. CONNECT THE CONTROL CABLE GROUND LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER
SOURCE GROUNDING TERMINAL (MARKED
AND LOCATED NEAR THE POWER SOURCE INPUT POWER CONNECTIONS) MUST BE PROPERLY CONNECTED
TO ELECTRICAL GROUND PER THE POWER SOURCE OPERATING MANUAL. .
N.E. THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD MUST BE CONNECTED AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S". CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".
WHEN USING NA-5 CONTROLS ABOVE CODE 8300 WITHOUT THE OPTIONAL DC-400 DIODE KIT OR CV-400, CVI-500 DIODE OPTIONS:
THE NA-5 INCH DOWN BUTTON WILL NOT OPERATE UNLESS A JUMPER IS CONNECTED BETWEEN THE TWO TAB TERMINALS, LABELED "AUTO",
LOCATED ABOVE THE TRANSFORMER ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE PC BOARD. THIS JUMPER, HOWEVER, WILL DISABLE THE COLD STARTING/AUTO STOP
FEATURE OF THE NA-5, PERMITTING ONLY HOT STARTING TECHNIQUES TO BE USED.
N.G. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.
N.H.*IF LEAD #21 IS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT TO THE #21 TERMINAL THAT MATCHES WORK POLARITY. THIS CONNECTION MUST
BE CHANGED WHENEVERTHE ELECTRODE POLARITY IS CHANGED.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

* DOES NOT APPLY TO DC-400 BELOW CODE 9200 WITH POLARITY SWITCH.

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

A-16

NOTES

NA-5

A-16

TABLE OF CONTENTS
- OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SECTION -

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator’s Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exposed Controls (With Lockable Cover Down)
Controls Under the Lockable Security Cover . .
Setup Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Stopping Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Means of Arc Striking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Travel Starting and Stopping . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconfiguring the Travel Sequences . . . . . . . .
Voltage Control Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Start Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security of Weld Procedure Settings . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Section B

. Section B
.
B-2
.
B-2
.
B-3
.
B-3
.
B-3
.
B-4
.
B-5
.
B-5
.
B-6
.
B-6
.
B-6
.
B-6
.
B-9
.
B-10
.
B-11
.
B-12

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Section B

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

1. Be sure there is enough electrode in
the machine to complete the weld.

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.
• Do not touch electrically live parts or electrode with skin or wet
clothing.

3. Start the power source.
4. Turn the “Power Control” switch on the
wire feeder control to “On.”

• Always wear dry insulating gloves.

5. Position the welding head at the start
of the weld. Be sure the travel carriage
or other travel mechanism is set to
move in the proper direction.

FUMES AND GASES
can be dangerous.
•

Keep your head out of
fumes.

•

Use ventilation or
exhaust to remove
fumes from breathing
zone.

or

• Keep flammable material away.
• Do not weld on containers that have held
combustibles.
ARC RAYS
can burn.
•

6. Set the travel switch to “Automatic
Travel.” When set to “Hand Travel”,
the travel system operates without
welding.
7. For best starts, cut the electrode to a
sharp point.
8. Press the “Inch Down” button to feed
the electrode out of the nozzle.
a. For most applications, when hot
starting, leave the electrode
1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or more away
from the work.
b. When cold starting some
submerged arc welding, inch the
electrode down until it touches the
work and the flux valve opens.
9. Press the “Start” button.

Wear eye, ear, and
body protection.

Observe additional Safety Guidelines
detailed in the beginning of this manual.
Return to Master TOC

2. If submerged arc welding, fill flux
hopper with new or freshly screened
flux. All reused flux must be screened
100% through an 8 mesh screen
[0.065 to 0.075 in. (1.6 to 1.9 mm)
opening]. Turn the switch on the
hopper to “On.”

• Insulate yourself from
work or ground.

WELDING SPARKS
can cause fire
explosion.

Return to Section TOC

B-2

OPERATOR’S
INSTRUCTIONS
Once the system is properly set up, the
operator can make production welds
without readjusting the controls using the
following simple instructions:
NA-5

10. While welding, turn the cross seam
adjuster handwheel as needed to keep
the arc in the joint.
11. At the end of the weld, press the
“Stop” button.
12. If needed, press the “Inch Up” button
to get the electrode up and out of the
way. Remove the work and reload the
fixture.
NOTE: When the contact tip in the end of the
nozzle wears during repetitive welding, it
must be replaced. Check the contact tip for
wear if weld quality seems to be
deteriorating.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-3

CONTROLS AND
THEIR FUNCTIONS

4. INCH UP AND INCH DOWN. Press to
inch electrode up or down.

The operator controls for the NA-5 are
illustrated in Figure B.1. Refer to the figure
and the following explanations of the
controls.

5. MODE SELECTOR SWITCH AND
LIGHTS. Used to preset the voltage
and wire feed speed for the various
modes of operation (Strike, Start,
Weld, and Crater).

EXPOSED CONTROLS (WITH
LOCKABLE COVER DOWN)
1. CIRCUIT BREAKER. Protects the
circuit from severe wire feed motor
overloads and short circuits. Press to
reset.
2. CONTROL POWER. Turns input
control power “On” and “Off.” Also
used as an emergency “Off” in case
of malfunction.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-3

3. ELECTRODE
“HOT”
LIGHT.
Comes on when the “Start button” is
pressed and the electrode circuit
becomes electrically hot.
FIGURE B.1 – NA-5 CONTROLS.

6. SET-ACTUAL BUTTON. When
pressed, will display the actual wire
speed and voltage in the wire speed
and volts meters. When the button is
not pressed, the set wire speed and
voltage is displayed.
7. START. Begins welding cycle.
8. STOP. Initiates the stopping cycle at
the end of the weld.
9. TRAVEL. Turn to “Off” for no travel,
“Hand Travel” for travel without
welding, and “Automatic Welding” for
welding operations.
10. VOLTS METER. Displays the set or
actual voltage for each mode (Strike,
Start, Weld, Crater).

CONTROLS UNDER THE
LOCKABLE SECURITY COVER

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

11. WIRE SPEED METER. Displays the
set or actual wire speed for each
mode (Strike, Start, Weld, Crater).

11

10

17

16

15

13
7

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

12

3
1

6

9

14
2

4

5

NA-5

8

12. ARC STRIKING CONTROLS. Sets
the wire speed until the welding
current begins to flow and controls
the power source voltage during arc
striking.
13. BURNBACK AND ELECTRODE
BACKUP TIME. Controls the length
of burnback delay time after the stop
circuit is energized.
14. WELD CONTROLS. Controls the
voltage and wire speed during the
welding mode.
15. CRATER CONTROLS (OPTIONAL).
Sets the ending current and voltage
for an adjustable period of time.
16. START CONTROLS (OPTIONAL).
Sets the starting current and voltage
for an adjustable period of time.
17. WELD TIME (OPTIONAL). Controls
the time of the weld mode.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-4

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
Use the following steps to set up the NA-5
welding system prior to welding:
1. If using a multi-process power source
(SAM, DC-400, DC-600, DC-1000,
OR DC-1500 type), make connections and settings per the power
source connection diagram (Figures
A.8 to A.14) for the process being
used.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

AUTO TAB
When using the NA-5 with the DC400 or CV-400 power source, the
auto tab jumper on the NA-5 voltage
PC board must be connected in order
for the inch down circuit to function.
When the auto tab jumper is
connected, the cold starting feature
of the NA-5 is disabled and only the
hot starting technique can be used. If
the cold start technique is to be used,
the optional Diode must be installed
on the DC-400 or CV-400.
2. Set the power source and NA-5
circuit polarity per information on
Electrode Polarity in Section A,
Installation.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. Depending on the procedures and
applications, decide:
a. The means of arc striking and
whether to start the travel with
the “Start” button or the arc.
b. Whether the initial bead size or
penetration requires use of the
optional “Start Controls.”
See the Starting and Stopping
Sequences section.
4. Depending upon the procedures and
applications:

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

a. Select the arc and travel stopping
sequence. See the Starting and
Stopping Sequences section.
b. Decide if the control of the ending
bead size or crater fill requires
the use of optional “Crater
Controls”. See the Starting and
Stopping Sequences section.

NA-5

B-4

5. Set the head position relative to the
work as required for the fixture,
application, and procedures. See
IM305 Sec. T3.2.3.
6. Rotate the wire straightener, if used,
until the top of the straightener faces
the wire reel. This is required for
smooth feeding of the electrode into
the straightener.
7. Refer to the instructions for the wire
contact assembly being used. See
IM305 Sec. T2.2.6, T2.2.7, T2.5.3, or
T2.5.4.
8. The mount for standard 50 and 60 lb
(22.7 and 27.2 kg) electrode coils
includes a two-position brake
assembly. Generally the brake should
be at the inner position (nearest to
the wire reel shaft) for wire feed
speeds below 400 in./min (10 m/min).
It should be at the outer position for
faster wire speeds. To adjust the
brake position, remove the wire reel.
Pull the cotter pin that holds the
brake shoe to the arm, move the
shoe, and replace the cotter pin. Do
not bend the cotter pin — it is held in
place by a friction fit.
9. Load the wire reel per IM305 Sec.
T3.2.2 or install the Speed-Feed
drum or reel per Sec. T2.5.7-A or -B.
10. Straighten the first 6 in. (152.4 mm)
of electrode and push it through the
wire straightener to the drive rolls. To
use the cored wire straightener,
remove the knurled nut at the top and
feed the wire through the nut, down
through the straightener, and into the
drive rolls. Screw the nut back onto
the straightener. Feed the wire
through the nozzle tip and adjust
the straightener for optimum
straightness. With wire contact
assemblies, except the K231, adjust
until the electrode is straight as it
comes out of the nozzle. Do not
completely straighten the wire when
using the K231 contact nozzle
because the nozzle relies on the
small curvature of the electode for
proper electrical contact within the
contact tip.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
11. Set the travel speed as specified by
the procedures. With the wire feeder
travel switch set to “Hand Travel”, the
travel runs without welding, permitting
accurate measurement of travel
speed. When using a Lincoln travel
carriage, adjust the speed with the
rheostat and the direction with the
toggle switch on the carriage control
panel.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

12. Connect the work lead to the work or
a suitable piece of scrap. Clip the
end of the electrode to a sharp point.
13. Preset the “Start” (if used), “Weld”,
and “Crater” (if used) controls to the
wire speed and voltage specified in
the procedure.
14. Make several test welds, readjusting
the controls in the following order:
a. Set the “Arc Striking”, “Inch Wire
Speed”, and “Volts” controls for
optimum arc striking.
The
optimum strike control settings for
most processes will be typically 4
to 5 volts higher than the weld
mode voltage setting and 40% to
50% of the weld mode wire feed
speed setting (possibly lower if
cold starting is used).
b. If striking is still not satisfactory,
refer to the section on Setting
Travel Starting and Stopping or
IM305 Sec. T3.5.2 for information
on wire feed motor acceleration.
c. If installed, adjust the “Start
Controls” to set the welding
procedures for the time set on the
timer to provide the bead size,
penetration, or other factor as
needed for the application.
d. If installed, adjust the “Crater
Controls” to set the welding
procedures for the set time after
the “Stop” button is pressed to
provide the bead size or fill the
crater as needed for the
application.
e. Set the “Burnback
Time” to
provide the stopping characteristics needed.

NA-5

B-5

STARTING AND STOPPING
SEQUENCES
MEANS OF ARC STRIKING
The NA-5 Codes utilize “hot start” arc
striking which operates as follows:
1. With the electrode not touching the
work, press the “Start” button.
2. The electrically “hot” electrode
inches down as set by the “Inch Wire
Speed” control.
3. When the electrode makes contact
with the work, the arc strikes and the
circuit automatically switches from
“Strike” settings to “Weld” (or “Start”,
if used) settings.
NA-5 models above Code 8300 offer both
“hot start” arc striking, as described
above, or “Cold Start” arc striking which
operates as follows:
1. Press the “Inch Down” button until the
tip of the electrode touches the work,
automatically stops, and the flux (if
used) is automatically dispensed.
NOTE: If inch speed is set too high, the
electrode may stop with too much force on
its tip, resulting in possible poor starting.
2. The arc establishes when the “Start”
button is pressed, and the circuit
automatically switches to “Weld” (or
“Start”, is used) settings. Should the
arc not start immediately, the wire will
retract slightly until the arc is
established and then feed down in the
normal manner.
Use either the standard “on-the-fly” travel
starting or rewire the controls for “standstill”
travel starting as described in the Setting
Travel Starting and Stopping section.
Optional “Start Controls”
Recommended for applications where
penetration, bead size, and other
characteristics must be carefully controlled
at the start.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-6

The starting sequence is as described above
except that when the arc strikes, the
machine welds at the wire speed and
voltage set by the “Start Controls” panel until
the time set on the thumbwheel switch
elapses. The circuit then automatically
switches to the “Welding Controls” wire
speed and voltage. Actual settings depend
on application requirements.
Available options for applications with
particularly difficult starting.

Return to Master TOC

1. K238 High Frequency Generator See IM305 Sec. T2.5.8.
Return to Section TOC

B-6

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3. Any application for improved arc
striking.
“Standstill” Travel Starting
All models can be reconnected so the travel
remains at a standstill until the arc starts.
“Standstill” travel starting is used when the
electrode must be started at a precise
location.
For consistent arc striking with “Standstill”
travel starting, always clip the end of the
electrode to a sharp point before starting.

STOPPING SEQUENCES

SETTING TRAVEL
STARTING AND STOPPING
Standard machines can be connected for a
variety of starting and stopping sequences.

STARTING SEQUENCES

As shipped, the travel stops when the “Stop”
button is pressed, producing a small crater
area.
When the end of the weld overlaps the
beginning, changing the stopping sequence
to stop the travel later spreads the crater
over a longer area.

“On-the-Fly” Travel Starting

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

When shipped, all models are connected for
“On-the-Fly” travel starting. The starting
sequence is as follows:
1. With the electrode NOT touching the
work, press the “Start” button. This
starts both the wire feed and travel
motors.
2. When the electrically “hot” electrode
touches the work to start the arc,
there is relative motion between the
end of the electrode and the work.
This “scratching” type contact helps
assure consistent arc striking.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

This sequence is recommended for most
welding applications including:
1. Roundabouts and any other weld
which ends at its starting point. A
K337 Weld Timer Module to control
the welding cycle duration can be
installed.
2. Welds started on a run-out tab.

NA-5

RECONFIGURING THE TRAVEL
SEQUENCES

WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.
• Turn off input power to
the welding power source
using the disconnect
switch before working on
this equipment.

To change the travel sequence, turn off all
input power to the NA-5 control box. Open
the control box. The logic board is mounted
on the back of the box in the upper right
hand corner. To change the travel circuit for
the various modes of starting and stopping,
follow the information in the wiring diagram
for the NA-5 being used. Table B.1 also
shows information on reconfiguring the
travel sequences.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-7

B-7

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE B.1 – TRAVEL SEQUENCE LEAD AND SWITCH POSITIONS.

Travel Starts
With “Start”
Button

Travel Stops
With “Stop”
Button

Older Models

Newer Models*

Lead #691 to Pin 6
Lead #692 to Pin 5

1

2

3

4

1

Switch #1

With Arc Striking With Arc Stopping

Lead #691 to Pin 6
Lead #692 to Pin 7

1

2

3

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Lead #691 to Pin 5
Lead #692 to Pin 7

4

1

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

2

3

With “Start”
Button

With “Start”
Button

With End Crater
Fill Time (With
optional procedure
module installed in
crater receptacle1)

Lead #691 to Pin 6
Lead #692 to Pin 9

After Burnback
Time (with
optional procedure
module installed
in crater
receptacle1)

Lead #691 to Pin 6
Lead #692 to Pin 8

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

4

1

*NOTE:
Indicates switch in up position
Indicates switch in down position
Indicates switch position does not matter

NA-5

3

4

2

3

4

2

3

4

Switch #2

Switch #1

DIP switch position 1 on switch #2 should be in the UP position as
shown. Additionally, remove 583C to 584C jumper plug from the pro
cedure board. If the procedure module is not installed, the switch
should be in the down position and the 583C to 584C jumper plug
should be reinstalled on the procedure board.

2

Switch #2

Switch #1

1

4

Switch #2

Switch #1

1If the optional procedure module is installed in the crater receptacle,

Return to Section TOC

1

3

Switch #2

Switch #1

With Arc Striking With Stop Button

2

2

3

Switch #2

4

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-8

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Wire Feed Motor Acceleration

The standard stopping sequence when the
optional “Crater Controls” are not used is as
follows:

WARNING

1. Press the “Stop” button.
ELECTRIC SHOCK
can kill.

2. The wire feed motor stops and the
“Burnback Time Delay” starts.

• Turn off input power to
the welding power source
using the disconnect
switch before working on
this equipment.

3. The arc continues to burn the
electrode back from the puddle until
the arc goes out or the time set on the
thumbwheel switch elapses. This
control should be set for just enough
burnback time to prevent crater
sticking.

The NA-5 has two different speeds of
controlled wire feed motor acceleration. As
shipped, the unit is connected for fast
acceleration which is best for most
applications. To change to the slower
acceleration, turn off all input power to the
NA-5 control box. Open the control box.
Locate the Control PC Board mounted on
the back of the box in the lower right hand
corner. Change the jumper plug from the “F”
pin to the “S” pin as shown in Figure B.2.
FIGURE B.2 – ACCELERATION
JUMPER PLUGS.

Return to Master TOC

JUMPER
PLUG
Return to Section TOC

B-8

There are two other ways this circuit can be
connected. One will cause the wire to
retract* with a contactor drop out delay at
the end of the weld. The second will cause
the wire to retract* during burnback time,
and there will be no contactor drop out delay
at the end of the weld. If either one of these
alternate methods of stopping the weld is
desired, the connections on the logic board
can be easily changed.
To change the stopping sequence, turn the
input AC power off at the power source,
remove the screw holding the inner panel,
and swing the panel open. Change the
connections (older models) or switch
positions (newer models) on the logic board
as shown in Table B.2.
Optional “Crater Controls”
This option is recommended for applications
where the ending bead size must be
controlled, applications when the crater must
be filled, roundabouts, and any other welds
where the end overlaps the start.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

When the “Stop” button is pressed, the
machine welds at the wire speed and
voltage set by the “Crater Controls” until the
time set on the thumbwheel switch elapses.
The circuit then automatically switches to the
arc stopping sequence described above.

Burnback and Electrode Backup
The primary consideration in setting the arc
stopping sequence is to prevent the
electrode from sticking in the puddle. This
is easily done with the machine as shipped.
NA-5

NOTE: Setting crater time to 0.00 seconds
will give zero crater time; however, the
crater settings will be active during
burnback time until the arc goes out.
*Wire will retract at weld mode speed (or crater mode
speed, if installed) until the arc goes out and then retract
at strike mode speed for the remainder of burnback
time.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-9

TABLE B.2 – STOPPING SEQUENCE SETTINGS.
When “Stop” Button
is Pressed

Older Models

Feed motor stops and
electrode burns back with
contactor delay (standard)

Lead #693 to Pin 3
Lead #690 to Pin 4

Feed motor inches up and
electrode burns back with
contactor delay

Lead #693 to Pin 1
Lead #690 to Pin 4

Feed motor inches up and
contactor opens
(no burnback)

Lead #693 to Pin 1
Lead #690 to Pin 2

Return to Master TOC

Newer Models*
1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

Switch #2

*NOTE:
Indicates switch in up position
Indicates switch in down position
Indicates switch position does not matter

FIGURE B.3 – VOLTAGE CONTROL
RESPONSE JUMPER PLUG
LOCATIONS.

The NA-5 is provided with selectable voltage
control response. Proper setting depends on
the power source and process being used.
Refer to the appropriate power source
connection diagram for the proper
connection of the jumpers located on the
NA-5 Voltage P.C. Board, shown in Figure
B.3.

RED
JUMPER
PLUG

To change the voltage control response:
1. Turn off all input power to the NA-5
control.

WHITE
JUMPER
PLUG

3. Locate the Voltage P.C. Board
mounted on the right side of the box.
Position the jumper plugs on the
Voltage P.C. Board per the
appropriate power source connection
diagram.

NA-5

B
D
A

NA-5
VOLTAGE

Return to Master TOC

4

Switch #2

2. Open the control box.

Return to Section TOC

4

Switch #2

VOLTAGE CONTROL
RESPONSE

Return to Section TOC

B-9

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-10

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN
If the NA-5 voltage control is unable to
supply the “Set” value of the arc voltage
while welding, the automatic shutdown
circuit will activate. This protection circuit
immediately returns the NA-5 control to idle
state within a few seconds after the arc
voltage discrepancy occurs.
Typical causes that activate this protective
shutdown circuit are as follows:

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

1. “Set” value of arc voltage is outside
the power source range.
2. Power source voltage control not set
for “Remote”.
3. Misconnection of NA-5 control cable
leads to the power source.
4. Incorrect weld polarity connections, or
settings, at NA-5 or power source.
5. Lost connection of NA-5 voltage
sensing leads (#67 and #21) between
arc and voltage control or a blown 1/8
amp fuse on voltage PC boards built
since 1983.
With NA-5 units above Code 8300, the
conditions of causes 4 and 5 above would
result in the wrong wire feed direction when
the weld is started. See the section on Cold
Start Circuitry.
In the case of full-range control power
sources, such as the DC-600, this protective
shutdown circuit could prevent welding
under the conditions of causes 3, 4 and 5
above by holding the power output at
minimum, possibly providing too low of a
power source output to even establish an
arc, or causing the field fuse to blow
because of rapid field reversals with NA-5
controls above Code 8300. See the section
on Cold Start Circuitry.
Although out of range shutdown can occur
with all power sources when working with
very low or very high arc voltages, it is most

NA-5

B-10

likely to occur when using the R3S models
with the somewhat limited voltage ranges of
the various taps. For instance, if the R3S400 triangle tap setting is for 31 volts, the
range of control from the remote circuit is
approximately 7 volts, i.e. 27.5 to 34.5 volts
at nominal input voltage. If the NA-5
controls are set for 29 volts, and the input
voltage to the R3S goes up, it may not be
possible for the NA-5 control circuit to hold
the 29 volts, so the welding will shut down.
By changing to the 27 volt triangle setting,
the range will be approximately 23.5 to 30.5
volts, and at high input voltage, there will be
sufficient control to hold the “Set” arc
voltage. On these machines, if the NA-5
stops welding, follow this procedure:
1. Move the NA-5 voltage set point 2
volts lower than the desired
procedure and make a test weld.
a. If the NA-5 still shuts down, go to
step 2 below.
b. If the NA-5 keeps welding,
change the R3S triangle setting
to the next higher voltage and
reset the NA-5 set point to the
desired procedure. The R3S is
now set properly unless there is
a significant change in input
voltage. Skip the following step.
2. Move the NA-5 voltage setting set
point 2 volts higher than the desired
procedure and make a test weld.
a. If the NA-5 keeps welding,
change the R3S triangle setting
to the next lower voltage and
reset the NA-5 set point to the
desired procedure. The R3S is
now set properly unless there is
a significant change in input
voltage. Skip the following step.
b. If the NA-5 still shuts down, refer
to the following paragraph and
other causes previously listed.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-11

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
In some cases, it is also possible to hold the
“Actual” button pressed while starting the
arc. Before the NA-5 shuts down, the actual
arc voltage can be read on the digital meter.
Comparing this reading to the “Set” reading
will tell what change in the range controls of
the power source are required so it can
supply the desired voltage. Should the
meter read zero, check the NA-5 sensing
leads (#21 and #67) connections. Should
the meter read negative (-) voltage, the
polarity connections or settings at the NA-5
or power source are wrong.
This same general procedure can be used
on the other power sources. For example,
if the NA-5 keeps shutting down and the
other possible causes have been checked,
adjust the “Set” voltage higher and/or lower
than the desired voltage. If the NA-5
continues to weld at one of these voltages,
it can be determined what change in the
range controls of the power source are
required so it can supply the desired voltage.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

COLD START CIRCUITRY
NA-5 controls above Code 8300 contain
circuitry added to the voltage PC board to
facilitate the “cold starting” features of these
units.* This circuitry senses the voltage
present between the electrode and work, via
leads #67 and #21, and permits normal wire
feed if this voltage exceeds approximately
6.5 VDC. However, if this voltage level is
not exceeded, or drops below approximately
3.5 VDC, the “Auto Stop” activates while
inching down or electrode backup occurs if
the arc start circuit has been initiated.
*Units below Code 8300 can be provided with the cold
start circuitry by replacing the old L-6257 voltage board
with the new G-1556 voltage board. This new board
will mount and connect in the same manner as the old
board, except the third harness connector (previously
connected to a jumper plug) must be connected to the
lower receptacle of the new voltage board.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

NOTE: HI-FREQ starting cannot be used
with converted units below Code 8300.

NA-5

B-11

A. Auto Stop
When the “Inch Down” button is pressed, a
low-level DC voltage signal is applied
between the electrode and work which
permits the wire to inch down normally.
When the electrode makes electrical contact
with the work, it shorts out this signal
causing the wire feed to automatically stop
and the flux solenoid to activate until the
“Inch Down” button is released. The “Inch
Up” button is not affected by this circuit.
B. Electrode Backup
If while starting or welding the electrode
stubs or shorts to work, the resulting loss of
arc voltage will cause the electrode to
momentarily back up until the arc voltage is
re-established and then change back to the
normal feed direction.
NOTE: The “cold starting” circuitry will
cause the NA-5 to feed in the wrong
direction when the “Start” button is pressed
if the “Actual” arc voltage, as read on the
NA-5 voltmeter, does not exceed typically
about 6.5 volts. Usual causes for the
situation are:
1. No wire loaded through the NA-5
head and nozzle assembly (except
when using the K148 Contact
Nozzle).
2. No power source weld cable
connection to the NA-5 head or work.
3. Incorrect
electrode
polarity
connections at the NA-5 or power
source.
4. Little or no output voltage from the
power source.
5. An open voltage sensing lead #67 or
#21 to the NA-5 control box or a
blown 1/8 amp fuse on a voltage PC
board built since 1983.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

B-12

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECURITY OF WELD
PROCEDURE SETTINGS
There are two means provided to prevent or
limit unauthorized readjustment of the NA-5
voltage and wire feed speed controls once
set to the desired procedure.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

1. The security panel of the NA-5 can be
locked to prevent access to the
control knobs.
2. The control range of the procedure
control knobs can be limited to either
about 3% or about 15% of the full
range control by installing a knob
rotation stop screw to any or all of the
control knobs. This stop screw is
installed in the following manner:

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

beneath each square so the head
is on the back side of the panel
(inside the control box).
f.

h. Turn on the NA-5 input power and
set the desired procedure by
rotating the shafts of the controls.
i.

Carefully replace each control
knob so the #4 screw inserts into
the center of the shorter length
channel on the back of the knob
for about 3% of the total range of
control or into the center of the
longer length channel for about
15% of the total range of control.

j.

With finger pressure on the knob
against the felt seal, carefully
retighten the set screw of each
knob.

b. Loosen each knob set screw and
remove all knobs, including the
rotary select switch knob.

d. Open
the
control
box.
Disconnect, then remove, the
procedure control PC board
assembly and its panel insulation.
e. Install a 1/2 in. long, pan or round
head, #4 sheet metal screw into
the 0.10 in. diameter hole located

NA-5

Remount the PC board assembly
and its panel insulation.
Reconnect the PC board and
close and secure the control box.

g. Remount the rotary select switch
knob and replace each square
spacer tube and felt seal so the
#4 screw protrudes between the
tube and the felt seal.

a. Turn off the input power to the
NA-5.

c. Remove the felt seal and square
spacer tube mounted behind
each control knob.

B-12

NOTE: Steps h thru j will have to be
repeated if it is desired to change the
procedure settings to values outside the
selected 3% or 15% control range limit.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
- ACCESSORIES SECTION -

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section C
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
Listing of Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K29 Vertical Lift Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K58 Magnetic Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K96 Horizontal Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K129 Submerged Arc Small Wire Twinarc® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K148 Contact Nozzle and K149 Linc-FillTM
Long Stickout Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K218 Horizontal Fillet/Lap Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K219 Flux Hopper Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K223 Solenoid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
K225 Submerged Arc Twinarc Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K238 High Frequency Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K239 Twinarc Kit for Innershield® Electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K278 SpreadarcTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K281 Solid Wire Straightener for Tiny Twinarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K285 Concentric Flux Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K310 Flux Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K325 TC-3 Travel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
K334 Start and Crater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-5
K336 Remote Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-5
K337 Weld Timer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-5
K349 Multi-Procedure Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-5
S-22022 or S-22182 Current Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-5
Speed-Feed Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-5
Speed-Feed Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Section C

NA-5

Section C

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

C-2

ACCESSORIES

C-2

GENERAL
This section contains a listing and short
description of the accessories that are

available with the NA-5 automatic welding
system.

TABLE C.1 – NA-5 AUTOMATIC WELDING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES.
Product Number

Product Name

K29

VERTICAL LIFT ADJUSTER

K58

MAGNETIC SEPARATOR

K96

HORIZONTAL ADJUSTER

K129

SUBMERGED ARC SMALL WIRE TWINARC

K148

CONTACT NOZZLE

K149

LINC-FILL LONG STICKOUT EXTENSION

K218

HORIZONTAL FILLET/LAP ATTACHMENT

K219

FLUX HOPPER KIT

K223

SOLENOID KIT

K225

SUBMERGED ARC TWINARC KIT

K238

HIGH FREQUENCY UNIT

K239

TWINARC KIT FOR INNERSHIELD ELECTRODES

K278

SPREADARC

K281

SOLID WIRE STRAIGHTENER FOR TINY TWINARC

K285

CONCENTRIC FLUX CONE

K310

FLUX SCREEN

K325

TC-3 TRAVEL CARRIAGE

K334

START AND CRATER CONTROLS

K336

REMOTE INTERFACE MODULE

K337

WELD TIMER MODULE

K349

MULTI-PROCEDURE KIT

S22022 or S22182

CURRENT RELAY
SPEED-FEED DRUMS
SPEED-FEED REELS

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

ACCESSORIES

C-3

K29 VERTICAL LIFT ADJUSTER

K148 CONTACT NOZZLE AND
K149 LINC-FILLTM LONG
STICKOUT EXTENSION

When mounted in the NA-5 head mounting
system, the K29 Vertical Lift Adjuster
provides quick hand crank adjustment of the
vertical head position. It also has some
horizontal adjustability as described in Sec.
T3.2.3 of operator’s manual IM305.
Installation instructions are shipped with
each K29 Vertical Lift Adjuster kit, are
contained in the IM305 manual, and can be
ordered as Sec. T2.2.11.

This Innershield and submerged arc nozzle
is designed for 0.062 through 3/16 in.
(1.57 through 4.76 mm) wire at high
currents. When long stickout [2 to 5 (50.80
to 127.00 mm)] is required, the K149
Linc-Fill Long Stickout Extension is
recommended along with the K237 Linc-Fill
Starting Relay. Instructions are contained in
the IM305 manual and can also be ordered
as Sec. T2.2.7.

K58 MAGNETIC SEPARATOR

K218 HORIZONTAL
FILLET/LAP ATTACHMENT

LISTING OF ACCESSORIES

Useful with any submerged arc equipment.
The unit removes foreign magnetic particles
from reused submerged arc welding flux.
Operating instructions are included with the
kit.

K96 HORIZONTAL ADJUSTER
When mounted in the NA-5 head mounting
system, the K96 Horizontal Adjuster
provides quick hand crank adjustment of the
horizontal head position. Installation
instructions are shipped with each K96
Horizontal Adjuster kit, are contained in the
IM305 manual, and can be ordered as Sec.
T2.2.12.

K129 SUBMERGED ARC SMALL
WIRE TWINARC®
The Twinarc system provides for the feeding
of two small solid wires through a single wire
feeder. The Twinarc assembly includes a
wire reel, reel brake, shaft and mounting
bracket, drive roll, idle roll assembly, dual
wire guides, and nozzle and contact tip or
contact tip holder. Instructions are shipped
with each kit, are contained in the IM305
manual, and can be ordered as Sec. T2.5.3
K129.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

C-3

NA-5

This special contact assembly automatically
guides the electrode when making
submerged arc horizontal fillet and lap welds
to ensure accurate bead placement without
expensive fixtures and clamps. Installation,
operating, and maintenance instructions are
shipped with each kit, are contained in the
IM305 manual, and can also be ordered as
Sec. T2.5.4.

K219 FLUX HOPPER KIT
This flux hopper, which has an electric flux
valve, can be mounted on NA-5N and
NA-5NF heads for submerged arc welding.
Installation instructions are included with
each kit. The operator and maintenance
instructions are contained in the IM305
manual and can also be ordered as
Sec. T2.5.9.

K223 SOLENOID KIT
The solenoid kit includes a valve to control
water flow when using the cooling
attachment on the K148 or K239 contact
nozzle assembly. It opens when the start
button is pressed and can be wired to close
either when the stop button is pressed or
when the arc goes out. Installation
instructions are shipped with each kit.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

C-4

ACCESSORIES
K225 SUBMERGED
ARC TWINARC KIT
The Twinarc kit provides for the feeding of
two 5/64, 3/32, or 1/8 in. (1.98, 2.38, or
3.18 mm) solid wires through a single wire
feeder. The electrode wire must be the
same size. The assembly includes a wire
reel, insulated reel mounting bracket, wire
straightener, dual wire guides, nozzle, and
contact block. Installation, operating, and
maintenance instructions are shipped with
each kit, are contained in the IM305 manual,
and can be ordered as Sec. T2.5.3 K225.

K238 HIGH FREQUENCY UNIT
This unit supplies high frequency to the
welding leads for more positive starts, which
may be required for certain difficult starting
applications. Factory-installed insulation is
required. Instructions are shipped with each
unit. Installation instructions are contained
in the IM305 manual and can be ordered as
Sec. T2.5.8.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

K239 TWINARC KIT FOR
INNERSHIELD® ELECTRODES
This kit provides for welding with two
Innershield electrodes. Two 3/32 in.
(2.38 mm) flux-cored electrodes are fed
through a single wire feeder. Both wires
must be the same size. The K239 kit
includes the nozzle equipped for water
cooling, drive rolls, drive roll locating collar,
idle roll assembly, ingoing and outgoing
guide tubes, wire straightener, wire reel, and
wire reel mounting shaft and insulation.
Instructions are included in the kit, are
contained in the IM305 manual, and can
also be ordered as Sec. T2.5.3 K239.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

K278 SPREADARC TM

C-4

arc, and submerged arc procedures can be
used. Instructions are shipped with the kit,
are contained in the IM305 manual, and can
also be ordered as Sec. T2.5.6.

K281 SOLID WIRE
STRAIGHTENER FOR
TINY TWINARC
This wire straightener will straighten 0.045
through 3/32 in. (1.14 through 2.38 mm) wire
diameters. It is recommended for welding
procedures requiring long stickout and
where wire position accuracy is essential.
Instructions are shipped with the kit, are
contained in the IM305 manual, and can be
ordered as Sec. T2.5.5.

K285 CONCENTRIC FLUX CONE
The concentric flux cone was designed to
fit on the K148 Contact Nozzle alone, the
K148 Contact Nozzle with a K149 Linc-Fill
Long Stickout Extension, the K129
Submerged Arc Small Wire Twinarc, and
the K391 nozzles. (The maximum electrical
stickout when using the K149 Linc-Fill Long
Stickout Extension will be 4 in. [101.6 mm.]).
Use of this attachment results in the flux
being fed concentrically around the
electrodes.
Installation, operating, and
maintenance instructions are shipped with
each kit, are contained in the IM305 manual,
and can be ordered as Sec. T2.2.8 K285.

K310 FLUX SCREEN
Useful for any submerged arc equipment. It
removes foreign magnetic particles from
reused submerged arc welding flux.
Operating instructions are included in the kit.

K325 TC-3 TRAVEL CARRIAGE

The primary application for this accessory is
for hardfacing buildup using a Twinarc
nozzle. The combination “SpreadarcTwinarc” covers large areas quickly with
smooth beads of minimum admixture with
the base metal. Flux cored electrode, open

NA-5

The K325 Travel Carriage carries the control
box and wire drive head, in either direction,
on a beam of suitable length and
mechanical specifications. Two models are
available: Standard and High Capacity.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

C-5

ACCESSORIES
K334 START AND CRATER
CONTROLS

S22022 OR S22182 CURRENT
RELAY MODULES

Easily installed procedure and timer boards
to permit adjustment of wire speed and
voltage. Can be installed to function at
either the start of the weld or at the end for
crater filling. Installation, operating, and
maintenance instructions are shipped with
each kit and can be ordered as Sec. T2.5.13
K334.

The current relay is useful to fixture builders
and others who need a signal indicating that
welding current is flowing. Installation,
operating, and maintenance instructions are
shipped with each kit. The S22022 relay
module is suitable for dry circuit applications
and it is rated at 2 Amps, 115 VAC or 28
VDC. This relay has both normally open and
normally closed contacts. The S22182 relay
module is suitable for applications requiring
at least 10 mA current and it is rated at 3
Amps, 115 VAC or 28 VDC. This relay only
has normally open contacts.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

K336 REMOTE INTERFACE
MODULE

Return to Section TOC

C-5

Permits connection of customer-furnished
remote start-stop and inch momentary
contact closure or momentary 24 volt
signals. Also used when a single remote
signal is desired to start or stop multiple
heads. This module replaces the earlier
K336 Remote Pushbutton Interface Module.
Installation and application instructions are
shipped with each kit and can be ordered as
Sec. T2.5.11 K336.

SPEED-FEED DRUM
These drums must be set on a turntable
which permits them to freely turn in a
clockwise direction. Installation, operating,
and maintenance instructions are contained
in the IM305 manual and can be ordered as
Sec. T2.5.7-A.

K337 WELD TIMER MODULE

SPEED-FEED REEL

Permits setting of weld time for an adjustable
period. Eliminates need to press the “Stop”
button. Instructions are included in the kit.

These reels require dereeling equipment
that permits the reel to rotate freely as the
electrode is used. Installation, operating,
and maintenance instructions are contained
in the IM305 manual and can be ordered as
Sec. T2.5.7-B.

K349 MULTI-PROCEDURE KIT
The K349 Multi-Procedure Kit provides three
additional weld mode procedure settings of
wire feed speed and voltage, allowing the
choice of four NA-5 weld mode procedures.
Installation, operating, and maintenance
instructions are shipped with each kit, are
contained in the IM305 manual, and can be
ordered as Sec. T2.5.19 K349.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

C-6

NOTES

NA-5

C-6

Section D

TABLE OF CONTENTS
- MAINTENANCE SECTION -

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Fault Fuse Protection . . .
Welding Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Drive Gear Box . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Wire Feed Gear Ratios .
Wire Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . .
Wire Straighteners . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Reel Mounting for 50 or 60 lb
Travel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Lift Adjuster . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . .
High Frequency Generator . . . . .
Spreadarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
(22.7 or 27.2
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Section D

NA-5

........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
kg) Coils
........
........
........
........
........

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. Section D
.
D-2
.
D-2
.
D-2
.
D-3
.
D-3
.
D-3
.
D-4
.
D-4
.
D-5
.
D-5
.
D-6
.
D-6
.
D-6
.
D-6
.
D-6
.
D-6
.
D-6
.
D-6

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

D-2

D-2

MAINTENANCE
CONTROL BOX
GENERAL
Inspect the control box every 3 months. If
needed, blow dirt out using low pressure air.
No further maintenance should be required.

If a complete or partial short occurs in the
field circuit, or if there is a defect on the PC
board, a 1/2 amp slow-blow type fuse will
blow. This field circuit fuse is mounted on the
power PC board, shown in Figure D.2, inside
the control box. Before replacing the fuse,
check the motor field for a short condition.
Normal resistance is approximately 700
ohms.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

CIRCUIT PROTECTION
The circuit breaker mounted on the left side
of the control box protects the control circuit
from short circuit conditions and from severe
wire feed overloads. If it is open, determine
and correct the cause for the overload. To
reset the circuit breaker, push in the red
button shown in Figure D.1.
FIGURE D.1 – CIRCUIT BREAKER
RESET BUTTON.

With NA-5 controls above Code 8300, the
field circuit fuse may blow due to frequent
motor field reversals from application
problems affecting the “cold” starting circuit,
such as the power source output being too
low to establish an arc or the welding
procedure causing frequent electrode-topuddle shorting. (Refer to Automatic
Shutdown in Section B, Operating
Instructions.)
FIGURE D.2 – POWER PC BOARD
FUSE LOCATIONS.

NA-5 POWER

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

POWER
1/2 AMP
SLOW-BLOW
FUSE

FIELD
1/2 AMP
SLOW-BLOW
FUSE

The power supply for the electronic circuitry
is protected by a 1/2 amp slow-blow type fuse
shown in Figure D.2. It is located on the
power PC board inside the control box.
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
RESET BUTTON

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

D-3

The 1/8 amp fast-blow fuse, shown in Figure
D.3, on a voltage PC board built since 1983,
protects the NA-5 circuitry from damage
which may result from a ground or case
faulted control lead. If the fuse blows, the
NA-5 voltage sensing lead circuit will be
opened (Refer to Automatic Shutdown in
Section B, Operating Procedures) and the
Troubleshooting Guide.

NA-5 circuit common (#510). Such a
condition typically exists when the NA-5
polarity connections are set for electrode
negative.

FIGURE D.3 – VOLTAGE BOARD FUSE
LOCATION.

Once a year, recoat all gear teeth with a
non-fluid molydisulfide type grease such as
Non-Fluid Oil Corporation’s A-29 Special/MS
Lubricant. For access to the gears in the first
chamber, remove the adapter plate and
motor assembly as shown in Figure D.4.

Return to Master TOC

1/8 AMP
FAST-BLOW
FUSE
Return to Section TOC

D-3

MAINTENANCE

WELDING HEAD
WIRE DRIVE GEAR BOX

FIGURE D.4 – WIRE DRIVE MOTOR
GEAR BOX.
DRIVE MOTOR
BRUSH ACCESS
HEX HEAD
SCREW

Return to Master TOC

FIRST
CHAMBER
PIPE
PLUG

NA-5
VOLTAGE

Return to Section TOC

ADAPTER
PLATE AND
MOTOR
ASSEMBLY

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

GROUND FAULT FUSE
PROTECTION

WIRE DRIVE
GEARBOX
SECOND
CHAMBER

SLOT HEAD
SCREW

A 1/8 amp fast-blow fuse, shown in Figure
D.3, is located on the voltage PC board.
This fuse will protect the NA-5 circuitry from
damage resulting from a ground or case
faulted control lead when the arc voltage
potential exists between ground and the

NA-5

To lubricate the gears in the second
chamber, remove one of the pipe plugs and
feed grease until it comes in contact with the
bevel gear teeth. Then, rotate the output
shaft by hand until all teeth are lubricated.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

D-4

WIRE DRIVE MOTOR

FIGURE D.5 – CHANGING THE WIRE
FEED GEAR RATIO

Periodically inspect the wire drive motor
brushes, Figure D.4. Replace the brushes
as needed.

CHANGING WIRE FEED GEAR
RATIOS

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Four wire size conversion kits are available
to modify the wire feeder for different size or
type electrodes. The kits include drive rolls
and guide tubes for the wire specified, as
shown in Table D.1.

Return to Section TOC

D-4

MAINTENANCE

TABLE D.1 - CONVERSION

HEX NUT (11)
PLAIN WASHER (9)
SLOT HEAD
SCREWS
WIRE (MOUNTING
SCREWS)
FEED
GEARBOX

KITS

Wire Type in. (mm)

Conversion Kit

3/32-7/32 (2.38-5.56)
Solid or Cored

T13724-A

1/16-3/32 (1.59-2.38)
Solid or Cored

T13724-B

0.035-0.052 (0.89-1.32)
Solid

T13724-C

0.045-0.052 (1.14-1.32)
Cored

T13724-D

Refer to Table D.2. Four gear ratios are
available: 21:1, 57:1, 95:1, and 142:1. To
change the gear ratio, replace the motor
pinion and the first reduction gear per the
following instructions (Refer to Figures D.4,
D.5 and D.6).
NOTE: Any item numbers in parentheses
on Figure D.5 refer to item numbers in the
task description breakdown.

INPUT
HELICAL
GEAR (12)

WOODRUFF
KEY (8)

1. Remove the four screws that mount
the adapter plate and motor assembly
to the gear box. Remove the adapter
plate and motor assembly from the
gear box.
2. Take the two long screws removed in
step 1 and screw one into each of the
tapped holes located on the face of
fiber input helical gear (12). Insert the
screws through the full thickness of
the gear, and using a screwdriver
wedged between the screws to
prevent rotation, remove hex nut (11)
that holds the gear to the shaft.
Remove plain washer (9).

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

TABLE D.2 – WIRE FEED GEAR RATIOS.
Gear
Ratio

Feed Speed
Range
in/min (m/min)

21:1

100-2070 (2.54-52.58)

0.052 (1.3)

0.052 (1.3)

57:1

40-778 (1.02-19.76)

3/32 (3.0)

1/16 (1.6)

95:1

22-456 (0.56-11.58)

5/32 (4.0)

1/8 (3.2)

142:1

15-300 (0.38-7.62)

5/32 (4.0)

7/32 (5.6)

NA-5

Max Wire Size
in. (mm)
Cored Wire
Solid Wire

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

D-5

3. Pull the gear from the shaft using the
screws as a pulling device.
4. Be certain woodruff key (8) is properly
located on the shaft. Screw the
adapter plate and motor assembly
mounting screws into the new fiber
input helical gear from the stenciled
side and place the gear on the shaft.
Replace plain washer (9), tighten the
hex nut (1), and remove the adapter
plate and motor assembly mounting
screws from the gear.
5. After noting the relation of the adapter
plate with the motor leads, remove
the adapter plate from the wire drive
motor. See Figure D.6. Support the
pinion properly and, with the proper
size punch, drive the roll pin that
holds the pinion out of the shaft. Pull
the pinion off. Install the new pinion
and replace the roll pin. Replace the
adapter plate in its original location.
6. Cover the teeth of the motor pinion
and the input gear with a non-fluid
molydisulfide type grease such as
Non-Fluid Oil Corporation’s A-29
Special/MS Lubricant. This grease
can be scooped from the cavity of the
gear case.
7. Reassemble the motor on the gear
box; make sure the gears mesh
properly and the adapter plate
locating bead is in its cavity. Replace
and tighten the four screws removed
in step 1.
8. Jumper on wire speed meter PC
board must be properly positioned for
the gear ratio and drive rolls being
used (See the wiring diagram for the
wire speed meter PC board.)

Return to Master TOC

WIRE DRIVE MECHANISM

Return to Section TOC

D-5

MAINTENANCE

Drive mechanisms for three wire size ranges
are available: 0.035 through 0.052 in.
(0.9 through 1.3 mm), 1/16 through 3/32 in.
1.6 through 2.4 mm), and 3/32 through
7/32 in. (2.4 through 5.6 mm). If changing to
wire sizes outside this range, change the
drive rolls and the incoming and outgoing
guide tubes. Also change the gear ratio as
necessary.

NA-5

FIGURE D.6 – DRIVE MOTOR PINION
GEAR REMOVAL.

WIRE
DRIVE
MOTOR

SHAFT

ADAPTOR
PLATE
PINION

ROLL PIN

MOUNTING
SCREW (X3)

The electrode is driven by gripping
between the grooved drive rolls and
spring-loaded idle roll. Replace the drive
rolls when they become worn. The drive rolls
for 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) and larger diameter
electrodes have two sets of teeth so they
can be reversed once before they must be
replaced.

WIRE STRAIGHTENERS
Solid Electrode
Periodically inspect the slide bushing at the
top of the straightener and the ingoing wire
guide at the bottom of the straightener for
signs of wire milling. If necessary, rotate the
guide to present an unworn surface. To
reverse the slide bushing for a fresh wear
surface, remove the cross adjustment screw
and turn the bushing over.
Flux-Cored Electrode
Severe wear at the “V” groove in the curved
arm of the straightener can result in wire
wander at the arc. Periodically check the
groove and replace the arm when badly
worn. Also replace the ingoing guide at the
top of the straightener if it shows signs of
wire milling.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

D-6

OPTIONAL FEATURES
CONTACT ASSEMBLIES
A dirty or rusty electrode and excessively
high currents cause rapid wear of the
contact tips. The nozzle contact tip must be
replaced when it no longer provides accurate
wire location or good electrical contact. See
Sec. T2.2.6, Sec. T2.2.7, or Sec. T2.5.3 of
the IM305 manual for specific instructions to
replace contact tips and to perform
maintenance on other various contact
assemblies.

WIRE REEL MOUNTING FOR
50 OR 60 LB (22.7 OR
27.2 KG) COILS
Periodically coat the reel shaft with a thin
layer of grease. No maintenance of the twoposition adjustable brake is needed except
to replace the shoe assembly if it wears
through.

TRAVEL CARRIAGE

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Periodically:
1. Disengage the release handle and
see that the carriage moves freely
along the beam.
2. Add a few drops of machine oil to
each of the head lift bearings. This
can be done through the front
opening in the carriage.
3. Add a few drops of oil to the clutch
handle bearings.
4. Add a few drops of oil into each of the
cups at the travel mounting pivot
point.
(No change of lubrication is required
for cold temperature operation.)
Return to Master TOC

Once a year:
Return to Section TOC

D-6

MAINTENANCE

1. Check the motor brushes. If 0.25 in.
(6.35 mm) or shorter, replace with
new brushes.

NA-5

2. Check the carriage drive gear teeth.
If the teeth are badly worn, replace
the drive gear.
3. After 5,000 hours of operation, the
motor and the first reduction gear
should be removed from the gear box,
and all the gear teeth should be
recoated with a good grade of
graphite grease.

VERTICAL LIFT ADJUSTER
Every month, add a few drops of SAE-140
oil or equivalent to the oil cup on the back
of the vertical lift housing. Every year,
replace the grease in the top section gear
cavity with a medium grease. If the unit is
disassembled for cleaning, apply a layer of
medium grease to the screw threads of the
head lift tube and head lift screw. Apply a
thin layer of grease to the outside diameter
of the head lift tube and the inside diameter
of the long hole in the head lift body. Slide
the head lift tube into the head lift body and
screw in the head lift screw. Fill the upper
section gear cavity one-half full of grease.
Be sure the needle bearings are packed in
grease.

HORIZONTAL ADJUSTER
Twice a year, apply a thin coat of grease to
all sliding surfaces. Every year, replace the
grease in the gear cavity with a medium
grease.

HIGH FREQUENCY GENERATOR
Inspect the spark gaps monthly and maintain
the setting specified on the spark gap cover
plate.

SPREADARC
Refer to the maintenance information
provided in IM305 Sec. T2.5.6.

THEORY OF OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
-THEORY OF OPERATION SECTIONTheory of Operation ..................................................................................................................Section E
General Description..........................................................................................................................E-2
Input Power Circuits .........................................................................................................................E-2
Power and Voltage Boards...............................................................................................................E-3
Control, Logic and Procedure Boards ..............................................................................................E-4
Optional start, Crater Fill and Weld Timer Boards............................................................................E-5
SCR Operation .................................................................................................................................E-6

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

E-1

NA-5

E-1

E-2

THEORY OF OPERATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

E-2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The NA-5 is a fully automatic wire feed
control unit. It is designed for multiple
process CV operation and can be used
with a variety of wire feeder heads, contact nozzles and welding processes.
The NA-5 control unit enables the operator to preset wire feed speed and arc

voltage on digital meters. These preset
conditions are internally monitored and
remain constant until changed by the
operator.

FIGURE E.1 Input Circuits
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)
1/2 AMP

WORK SENSING (#21)

F501
SET VOLTAGE

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

115VAC

TACH

MOTOR
A
R
M
A
T
U
R
E

INPUT
POWER
SWITCH
CONTROL
CABLE
RECEPTACLE

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

R1(2 OHMS)

#31
115
VAC
#32

F1

Return to Master TOC

T1

Return to Section TOC

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

F
I
E
L
D

P
O
W
E
R
B
O
A
R
D

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

START

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

SWITCH

STOP
SWITCH

INCH
DOWN
SWITCH

A
R
C A
N
V D
O
L S
T H
A U
GT
E D
O
W
N

LOGIC
BOARD

FIELD

DIRECTION

MOTOR

SIGNAL

ARMATURE

T2

2
CR
1
CR

S
I
G
N
A
L
S

36VAC (18+18VAC)

STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE
ENABLE

F
E
E
D
G
A
T
E

E
N
A
B
L
E

FLUX
RECEPTACLE

3
CR

F2

VOLTS
SPEED
P
R
STRIKE
OB
CO
EA
DR
UD
WELD
R
E
VOLTS
SPEED

OPTIONAL
START
BOARD

START
TIMER

OPTIONAL
CRATER
BOARD

CRATER
TIMER

OPTIONAL
WELD
TIMER

BURNBACK
TIMER

WELD
CURRENT
REED SWITCH

S
I
G
N
A
L

SET SPEED

22VAC
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE

DC VOLTAGE

VOLT
METER
BOARD

TRAVEL
RECEPTACLE

DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

115VAC
1
0
V
A
C

VOLTAGE
BOARD

ODE SENSING (#67)
R
T
C
E
L
D
E
C
S
U
P
P
L
Y

SPEED
METER
BOARD

CONTROL
BOARD

WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)

TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

INCH
UP
SWITCH

DIGITAL
METER

DIGITAL
METER

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

INPUT POWER CIRCUITS
The NA-5 control unit is supplied with
115VAC power usually from the welding
power source. The 115VAC power is
connected to the control box circuitry
through the control cable receptacle,
the input power switch and a 5 amp circuit breaker.
The 115VAC is applied through a 2 ohm
resistor to the power board where is
rectified and controlled to supply armature and field voltage to the wire drive

motor. The voltage board receives
115VAC and transforms and rectifies it
to 24VDC for the "work touch sensing"
circuit. The T1 and T2 transformer primaries are also supplied with 115VAC
via the F1 (1/2amp) fuse on the power
board. The T1 and T2 secondary windings offer a variety of isolated AC supply voltages to the power, logic and
meter boards.

NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.
NA-5

FIGURE E.2 Power and Voltage Boards
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)
1/2 AMP

WORK SENSING (#21)

F501

115VAC
SET VOLTAGE

TACH

MOTOR
A
R
M
A
T
U
R
E

Return to Master TOC

INPUT
POWER
SWITCH

Return to Section TOC

E-3

THEORY OF OPERATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

E-3

CONTROL
CABLE
RECEPTACLE

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

R1(2 OHMS)

#31
115
VAC
#32

F1

T1

F
I
E
L
D

P
O
W
E
R
B
O
A
R
D

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

START

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

SWITCH

STOP
SWITCH

INCH
DOWN
SWITCH

A
R
C A
N
V D
O
L S
T H
A U
GT
E D
O
W
N

LOGIC
BOARD

FIELD

DIRECTION

MOTOR

SIGNAL

ARMATURE

T2

2
CR
1
CR

S
I
G
N
A
L
S

36VAC (18+18VAC)

STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE
ENABLE

F
E
E
D
G
A
T
E

E
N
A
B
L
E

FLUX
RECEPTACLE

3
CR

F2

VOLTS
SPEED
P
R
STRIKE
OB
CO
EA
DR
UD
WELD
R
E
VOLTS
SPEED

OPTIONAL
START
BOARD

START
TIMER

OPTIONAL
CRATER
BOARD

CRATER
TIMER

OPTIONAL
WELD
TIMER

BURNBACK
TIMER

WELD
CURRENT
REED SWITCH

S
I
G
N
A
L

SET SPEED

22VAC
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE

DC VOLTAGE

VOLT
METER
BOARD

TRAVEL
RECEPTACLE

DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

115VAC
1
0
V
A
C

VOLTAGE
BOARD

ODE SENSING (#67)
R
T
C
E
L
D
E
C
S
U
P
P
L
Y

SPEED
METER
BOARD

CONTROL
BOARD

WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)

TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

INCH
UP
SWITCH

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

DIGITAL
METER

DIGITAL
METER

POWER AND VOLTAGE
BOARDS
The AC voltages that are received by
the power board are rectified and regulated. These DC voltages are supplied
to the motor, voltage board and control
board. The two SCR-controlled
115VDC supplies power the motor
armature and field circuits.
The actual arc voltage is sensed at leads
#67(electrode) and #21(work) which are
coupled to the voltage board. The preset voltage requirements are also sent to
the voltage board. This information is
compared and processed on the voltage
board and the resultant correction signal
is sent to the Lincoln CV power source
via the remote voltage leads (A,B,C).
The preset and actual arc voltage information is also sent to the voltage meter
board where it is processed and displayed on the digital meter.

The voltage board also generates a low
DC voltage that is applied to the electrode during the inch down mode.
When the electrode makes contact with
the work piece, this low voltage is
"loaded down", signaling the control circuitry to stop the wire feed motor. This
feature allows the operator to utilize the
"work touch sensing" feature.
If for any reason the actual welding arc
voltage does not match the set weld
voltage
(+/- 0.5Volts) the NA-5 will shutdown.
This feature insures that the actual
welding voltage is the same as the preset voltage during the welding cycle.
This circuitry is incorporated on the voltage board.

NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.
NA-5

FIGURE E.4 Control Logic and Procedure Boards
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)
1/2 AMP

WORK SENSING (#21)

F501

115VAC
SET VOLTAGE

TACH

MOTOR
A
R
M
A
T
U
R
E

Return to Master TOC

INPUT
POWER
SWITCH

Return to Section TOC

E-4

THEORY OF OPERATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

E-4

CONTROL
CABLE
RECEPTACLE

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

R1(2 OHMS)

#31
115
VAC
#32

F1

T1

F
I
E
L
D

P
O
W
E
R
B
O
A
R
D

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

START

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

SWITCH

STOP
SWITCH

INCH
DOWN
SWITCH

A
R
C A
N
V D
O
L S
T H
A U
GT
E D
O
W
N

LOGIC
BOARD

FIELD

DIRECTION

MOTOR

SIGNAL

ARMATURE

T2

2
CR
1
CR

S
I
G
N
A
L
S

36VAC (18+18VAC)

STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE
ENABLE

F
E
E
D
G
A
T
E

E
N
A
B
L
E

FLUX
RECEPTACLE

3
CR

F2

VOLTS
SPEED
P
R
STRIKE
OB
CO
EA
DR
UD
WELD
R
E
VOLTS
SPEED

OPTIONAL
START
BOARD

START
TIMER

OPTIONAL
CRATER
BOARD

CRATER
TIMER

OPTIONAL
WELD
TIMER

BURNBACK
TIMER

WELD
CURRENT
REED SWITCH

S
I
G
N
A
L

SET SPEED

22VAC
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE

DC VOLTAGE

VOLT
METER
BOARD

TRAVEL
RECEPTACLE

DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

115VAC
1
0
V
A
C

VOLTAGE
BOARD

ODE SENSING (#67)
R
T
C
E
L
D
E
C
S
U
P
P
L
Y

SPEED
METER
BOARD

CONTROL
BOARD

WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)

TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

INCH
UP
SWITCH

DIGITAL
METER

DIGITAL
METER

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

CONTROL, LOGIC AND
PROCEDURE BOARDS

board to proceed from the "strike" settings to the optional
start board if used, or to the welding wire speed and arc
voltage parameters.

The logic board interprets and processes the signals it
receives from the various PC boards, switches and controls. The logic board also houses a DC power supply
(+5 -10) which is derived from the 22VAC received from
the T2 transformer. This DC voltage is also used on the
procedure board.
Upon receiving voltage reference level commands from
the procedure and voltage boards, or the user-operated
switches, the logic board sends the appropriate command signals to the control and power boards to drive
the wire feed motor to the proper speed and direction.
When the "start" signal is received by the logic board the
power source contact relay (3CR) is energized along
with the travel relay (2CR) and the flux relay (1CR). The
"inch down" and "stop" switches signal the logic board
which then directs the control and power boards to apply
the appropriate armature and field voltages to the wire
drive motor. The "inch up" switch, which is connected
directly to the control board, dictates that the wire drive
motor reverse direction, backing the electrode wire away
from the work piece. When the welding current closes
the reed switch the logic board directs the procedure

The control board receives information from the logic
board, the procedure board and the tach feedback circuit. The control board then applies the appropriate gate
signal to the SCR power supply on the power board.
This variable and regulated DC voltage is applied to the
motor armature thus controlling the speed of the wire
feed motor. The preset and actual wire feed speed information is sent to the speed meter board where it is
processed and displayed on the digital meter.
The procedure board incorporates the many options
available with the NA-5. The "strike" and "weld" controls
are part of the procedure board and are not optional.
The wire feed speed and arc voltage settings for the various modes are "programmed" through the procedure
board and are then sent to the logic, voltage and control
boards at the appropriate times during the welding cycle.
The burnback time is also coupled through the procedure
board. This control determines the length of time of
burnback delay after the stop circuit is energized.
Depending on the connections on the logic board, it may
also determine the length of time the wire feed motor
reverses after the stop button is pressed.

NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.
NA-5

FIGURE E.3 Optional Start, Crater Fill and Weld Timer Boards
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)
1/2 AMP

WORK SENSING (#21)

F501

115VAC
SET VOLTAGE

TACH

MOTOR
A
R
M
A
T
U
R
E

INPUT
POWER
SWITCH
CONTROL
CABLE
RECEPTACLE

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

E-5

THEORY OF OPERATION

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

E-5

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

R1(2 OHMS)

#31
115
VAC
#32

F1

T1

F
I
E
L
D

P
O
W
E
R
B
O
A
R
D

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

START

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

SWITCH

STOP
SWITCH

INCH
DOWN
SWITCH

A
R
C A
N
V D
O
L S
T H
A U
GT
E D
O
W
N

LOGIC
BOARD

FIELD

DIRECTION

MOTOR

SIGNAL

ARMATURE

T2

2
CR
1
CR

S
I
G
N
A
L
S

36VAC (18+18VAC)

STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE
ENABLE

F
E
E
D
G
A
T
E

E
N
A
B
L
E

FLUX
RECEPTACLE

3
CR

F2

VOLTS
SPEED
P
R
STRIKE
OB
CO
EA
DR
UD
WELD
R
E
VOLTS
SPEED

OPTIONAL
START
BOARD

START
TIMER

OPTIONAL
CRATER
BOARD

CRATER
TIMER

OPTIONAL
WELD
TIMER

BURNBACK
TIMER

WELD
CURRENT
REED SWITCH

S
I
G
N
A
L

SET SPEED

22VAC
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE

DC VOLTAGE

VOLT
METER
BOARD

TRAVEL
RECEPTACLE

DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

115VAC
1
0
V
A
C

VOLTAGE
BOARD

ODE SENSING (#67)
R
T
C
E
L
D
E
C
S
U
P
P
L
Y

SPEED
METER
BOARD

CONTROL
BOARD

WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)

TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)

INCH
UP
SWITCH

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

DIGITAL
METER

DIGITAL
METER

OPTIONAL START, CRATER
FILL AND WELD TIMER
BOARDS
When installed, the optional start board
dictates to the procedure board the
starting wire feed speed and arc voltage. This condition can be operator set
for a predetermined period of time.
These parameters can be set either
higher or lower than those of the welding procedure to control penetration,
bead shape, or other factors at the start
of the weld. The start circuit becomes
active when the weld current sensing
reed switch is closed.

is pressed. This optional feature is
helpful in controlling bead shape and
filling craters at the end of a weld.
The weld timer permits setting of weld
time for an adjustable period of time.
This feature eliminates the need to
press the "stop" switch.

The crater fill board is used by the operator to adjust the finishing wire feed
speed and voltage either higher or
lower than the welding procedure for an
adjustable period of time. This circuit
becomes active when the "stop" switch
NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.
NA-5

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

E-6

THEORY OF OPERATION

SCR OPERATION
A silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) is a three terminal
device used to control rather large currents to a load.
An SCR acts very much like a switch. When a gate
signal is applied to the SCR it is turned ON and there
is current flow from anode to cathode. In the ON state
the SCR acts like a closed switch. When the SCR is
turned OFF there is no current flow from anode to
cathode thus the device acts like an open switch. As
the name suggests, the SCR is a rectifier, so it passes
current only during positive half cycles of the AC supply. The positive half cycle is the portion of the sine
wave in which the anode of the SCR is more positive
than the cathode.

these terminals must be slightly greater than 0.6V.
Once the SCR has fired it is not necessary to continue
the flow of gate current. As long as current continues
to flow from anode to cathode the SCR will remain on.
When the anode to cathode current drops below a
minimum value, called holding current, the SCR will
shut off. This normally occurs as the AC supply voltage passes through zero into the negative portion of
the sine wave. If the SCR is turned on early in the
positive half cycle, the conduction time is longer
resulting in greater SCR output. If the gate firing
occurs later in the cycle the conduction time is less
resulting in lower SCR output.

When an AC supply voltage is applied to the SCR, the
device spends a certain portion of the AC cycle time in
the on state and the remainder of the time in the off
state. The amount of time spent in the ON state is
controlled by the Gate.
An SCR is fired by a short burst of current into the
gate. This gate pulse must be more positive than the
cathode voltage. Since there is a standard PN junction between gate and cathode, the voltage between

INPUT

CATHODE
OUTPUT

NOTE: AS THE GATE
PULSE IS APPLIED
LATER IN THE CYCLE
THE SCR OUTPUT
IS DECREASED.

ANODE
GATE

Return to Master TOC

GATE

Return to Section TOC

E-6

FIGURE E.4 SCR Operation
NA-5

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

SECTION F-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
-TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR SECTION-

Troubleshooting and Repair ......................................................................................................Section F
How to Use Troubleshooting Guide......................................................................................................F-2
PC Board Troubleshooting Procedures................................................................................................F-3
Troubleshooting Guide .........................................................................................................................F-4
PC Board LED Definitions ..................................................................................................................F-36
PC Board LED Sequence Table.........................................................................................................F-37
Test Procedures .................................................................................................................................F-38
DC Power Supply Test ....................................................................................................................F-38
T1 and T2 Transformer Test ...........................................................................................................F-42
Voltage Board Transformer Test .....................................................................................................F-45
Wire Feed Drive Motor Test ............................................................................................................F-48
External Resistance Test (Leads #21 and #67) ..............................................................................F-50
Out of Voltage Range Shut Sown Test ...........................................................................................F-52
Tach Board Feedback Test .............................................................................................................F-55
VoltmeterAccuracy Test ..................................................................................................................F-57
Wire Speed Accuracy Test..............................................................................................................F-60
Meter Circuit Accuracy Test ............................................................................................................F-64
Replacement Procedures ...................................................................................................................F-71
PC Board(s) Removal and Replacement ........................................................................................F-71
Digital Meter and Meter PC Board Removal and Replacement ......................................................F-73
Tach PC Board Removal and Replacement ...................................................................................F-77
Wire Drive Motor Removal and Replacement .................................................................................F-81
Retest After Repair .............................................................................................................................F-85

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

SECTION F-1

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-2

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-2

HOW TO USE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
WARNING

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Service and Repair should only be performed by Lincoln Electric Factory Trained Personnel.
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician and
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid
Electrical Shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this
manual.
__________________________________________________________________________
This Troubleshooting Guide is provided to
help you locate and repair possible machine
malfunctions. Simply follow the three-step
procedure listed below.

Step 1. LOCATE PROBLEM (SYMPTOM).
Look under the column labeled “PROBLEM
(SYMPTOMS)”. This column describes
possible symptoms that the machine may
exhibit. Find the listing that best describes
the symptom that the machine is exhibiting.
Symptoms are grouped into the following
categories: wire feeding problems, mode
function problems, function problems and
welding problems.
Step 2. PERFORM EXTERNAL TESTS.
The second column labeled “POSSIBLE
AREAS OF MISADJUSTMENT(S)” lists the
obvious external possibilities that may contribute to the machine symptom. Perform
these tests/checks in the order listed. In
general, these tests can be conducted with-

out removing the case wrap-around cover.
Step 3. RECOMMENDED COURSE OF
ACTION
The last column labeled “Recommended
Course of Action” lists the most likely components that may have failed in your
machine. It also specifies the appropriate
test procedure to verify that the subject
component is either good or bad. If there
are a number of possible components,
check the components in the order listed to
eliminate one possibility at a time until you
locate the cause of your problem.
All of the referenced test procedures
referred to in the Troubleshooting Guide are
described in detail at the end of this chapter. Refer to the Troubleshooting and Repair
Table of Contents to locate each specific
Test Procedure. All of the specified test
points, components, terminal strips, etc. can
be found on the referenced electrical wiring
diagrams and schematics. Refer to the
Electrical Diagrams Section Table of
Contents to locate the appropriate diagram.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the
tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

_____________________________________________________________

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-3

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
PC BOARD TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.
Have an electrician install
and service this equipment. Turn the input power
OFF at the fuse box before
working on equipment. Do
not touch electrically hot
parts.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

CAUTION: Sometimes machine failures
appear to be due to PC board failures. These
problems can sometimes be traced to poor
electrical connections. To avoid problems
when troubleshooting and replacing PC
boards, please use the following procedure:
1. Determine to the best of your technical
ability that the PC board is the most likely
component causing the failure symptom.
2. Check for loose connections at the PC
board to assure that the PC board is properly connected.
3. If the problem persists, replace the suspect PC board using standard practices to
avoid static electrical damage and electrical shock. Read the warning inside the
static resistant bag and perform the following procedures:
P.C. Board can be damaged by static electricity.

ATTENTION
Static-Sensitive
Devices
Handle only at
Static-Safe
Workstations

- Remove your body’s static charge before opening
the static-shielding bag.
Wear an anti-static wrist
strap. For safety, use a 1
Meg ohm resistive cord
connected to a grounded
part of the equipment
frame.

Reusable
Container
Do Not Destroy

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

_______________________________

Return to Section TOC

F-3

- If you don’t have a wrist
strap, touch an unpainted,
grounded, part of the
equipment frame. Keep touching the frame to
prevent static build-up. Be sure not to touch
any electrically live parts at the same time.
- Tools which come in contact with the P.C.
Board must be either conductive, anti-static or
static-dissipative.
NA-5

- Remove the P.C. Board from the staticshielding bag and place it directly into the
equipment. Don’t set the P.C. Board on or
near paper, plastic or cloth which could have
a static charge. If the P.C. Board can’t be
installed immediately, put it back in the staticshielding bag.
- If the P.C. Board uses protective shorting
jumpers, don’t remove them until installation
is complete.
- If you return a P.C. Board to The Lincoln
Electric Company for credit, it must be in the
static-shielding bag. This will prevent further
damage and allow proper failure analysis.
4. Test the machine to determine if the failure symptom has been corrected by the
replacement PC board.
NOTE: It is desirable to have a spare (known
good) PC board available for PC board troubleshooting.
NOTE: Allow the machine to heat up so that
all electrical components can reach their operating temperature.
5. Remove the replacement PC board and
substitute it with the original PC board to
recreate the original problem.
a. If the original problem does not reappear by substituting the original
board, then the PC board was not the
problem. Continue to look for bad
connections in the control wiring harness, junction blocks, and terminal
strips.
b. If the original problem is recreated by
the substitution of the original board,
then the PC board was the problem.
Reinstall the replacement PC board
and test the machine.
6. Always indicate that this procedure was
followed when warranty reports are to be
submitted.
NOTE: Following this procedure and writing
on the warranty report, “INSTALLED AND
SWITCHED PC BOARDS TO VERIFY
PROBLEM,” will help avoid denial of legitimate PC board warranty claims.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-4

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

2. Check the “Inch Down” switch
(S4). Make sure it is not stuck
closed.

Return to Master TOC

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
The wire feeds whenever the input
1. Check the “Start” switch (S5).
power switch is in the “ON” position.
Make sure it is not stuck closed.

3. Check the “Inch Up” switch (S3)
Make sure it is not stuck closed.
Return to Section TOC

F-4

4. Check to make sure that jumper
lead #693 is connected to the
proper pin on the logic board.
See wiring diagram.

1. Check light 7B on the logic board.
It should NOT be on. If light 7B is
ON remove lead #518A from the
“Start” switch. If the light remains
ON the logic board may be faulty.
If the light goes OFF check the
switch and associated leads.
See wiring diagram and Figure
F.1.
2. Check light 7J on the logic board.
It should NOT be on. If light 7J is
ON remove lead #592 from the
“Inch Down” switch. If the light
remains ON the logic board may
be faulty. If the light goes OFF
check the switch and associated
leads. See wiring diagram and
Figure F.1.

4. Check lights 7B, 7J and 7E.
They should all be OFF. If lights
7B and 7J are OFF and light 7E
is ON the logic board may be
faulty. See Figure F.1.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. |Disconnect lead #586 from the
“Inch Up” switch. If the problem
is resolved check the switch and
associated leads. See wiring diagram.

5. Disconnect plug “A” from the logic
board. If the wire feed stops the
logic board may be faulty. See
Figure F.1.
6. If the feed does not stop with plug
“A” disconnected, disconnect plug
“E” from the logic board. If the
wire feed stops with plug “E” disconnected the logic board may be
faulty. If the wire feed does NOT
stop with plug “E” disconnected
the power board may be faulty.
Replace. See Figure F.1.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-5

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-5

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
The wire does not feed. Pressing
1. Make sure input power switch is
any of the switches (buttons) will
ON.
NOT feed the wire. The motor does
NOT run.
2. Check the circuit breaker (CB1).
Reset if tripped.

1. Check the lights (LEDS) locate on
the PC boards. Some should be
lit. See Table F.1. If none of the
lights are lit perform the T1 and
T2
Transformer
Test.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

3. Make sure 115VAC is being
2. If the appropriate lights are lit
applied to the control box through
(see Table F.1.) and the wire
the control cable receptacle.
does NOT feed perform the Wire
Leads #31 and #32.
Drive Motor Test.
4. Check the two fuses on the
3. If only some of the appropriate
power board. Replace if blown. If
lights on the power board are lit
fuse F101 immediately fails when
the power board may be faulty.
replaced contact your local
Lincoln Authorized Field Service 4. If all of the appropriate lights are
Facility.
lit, except light 1D on the power,
board, check resistor R1. Normal
5. Make sure the motor cable is conresistance is 2 ohms. See wiring
nected to the motor receptacle on
diagram.
the NA-5 control box.
5. If fuse F101 immediately fails
when input power is applied,
unplug all of the PC boards
except the power board. If the
fuse still fails the power board
may be faulty. If the fuse does
not fail reconnect the PC boards
one at a time until the faulty
board is located. Also check and
inspect the wiring harness for
“short” or “grounds”. Reconnect
the PC boards in the following
order: control, voltage,logic,procedure,option,timer, remote interface,speedmeter and voltmeter.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

NOTE: Some of the above PC
boards are optional and may not
be used in all NA-5 control units.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-6

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-6

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
The wire will not feed and the circuit 1. Check for a mechanical restricbreaker (CB1) trips when the inch
tion in the wire feeding path.
down, inch up or the start buttons
are pressed. The wire drive motor
2. Make sure the proper input voltdoes not turn.
age (115VAC) is applied to the
NA-5 control unit.
3. Check the F102 field fuse on the
power board. Replace if faulty.
Note: Frequent motor polarity
changes can cause the fuse to
fail. This can be caused by the
following:
•A welding procedure with
frequent electrode to puddle
shorting.

1. Perform the Wire Drive Motor
Test.
2. The power board may be faulty.
See Table F.1.
3. Check the motor control cable for
“shorts’ or “grounds”.

•A power source output too
low to establish an arc.

When the inch up button is press the 1. The welding head is designed to
feed wire in the proper direction
wire feeds down. When the inch
when it is installed as shipped
down button is pressed the wire
from the factory. If the nozzle
feeds up.
and wire straightener aare rotated
about the axis of the gearbox
outpu shaft, the wire may feed in
the opposite direction.
Interchange leads #626 and #627
at the terminal strip (TS2) inside
the control box. See wiring diagram.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-7

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-7

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
The wire will not feed when the inch 1. If a DC400, Pulse Power 500 or a 1. Disconnect the white #21 lead
down button is pressed. The wire
CV400 power source is used a
from the NA-5 polarity terminal
does inch up OK and feeds down
Diode Kit must be installed in the
strip (TS1). See wiring diagram.
when the start button is pressed.
power source.
With the inch down button
pressed read the ACTUAL volts
2. Check to see if light 7J on the
on the NA-5 digital voltmeter.
logic board is ON while the inch
The digital meter should read
down button is pressed. If it does
over 19 volts and the wire should
NOT light check the inch down
inch down. If not, perform the
button and associated leads.
Voltage Board Transformer
See wiring diagram.
Test. If the test is OK the voltage
•(For codes below 8300) If
board may be faulty. Replace.
light 7J DOES light when
the inch down button is
2. If the voltage is over 19 volts
pressed the logic board
and the wire DOES inch down
may be faulty.
with the #21 lead disconnected
reconnect the #21 lead to the
•(For codes above 8300)
terminal strip and read the
ACTUAL volts with the inch
Jumper the AUTO tabs on
down button pressed. If the
the voltage board and press
voltage is less than 8 volts perinch down button. If the
form the #21 - #67 External
wire does NOT feed down
the logic board may be
Resistance Test. If the resisfaulty.
tance test is OK the voltage
board may be faulty. Replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-8

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-8

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
The wire will not inch down but does 1. Check to make sure that light 7J, 1. The logic board may be faulty.
inch up properly. The wire does not
on the logic board, is lit when the
Replace.
feed in either direction when the start
inch down button is pressed. If
button is pressed.
not check the inch down switch
2. The power board may be faulty.
and associated leads. See wiring
Replace.
diagram.
2. Check to make sure that light 7B,
on the logic board, is lit when the
start button is pressed. If not
check the start button and associated leads. See wiring diagram.

The wire will not inch down but does 1. For codes below 8300 make sure 1. Jumper the AUTO tabs on the
the jumper plug is securely
inch up properly. When the start
voltage board. (Above code
installed in the harness receptacle
button is pressed the wire feeds up
8300) Press the inch down butnear the voltage board.
instead of down.
ton. If the wire inches down the
voltage board may be faulty.
2. Check to make sure light 7E, on
Replace.
the logic board, is on when the
inch down button is pressed. If
If the wire does NOT inch down
light 7E is ON the power board
the logic board may be faulty.
may be faulty.
Replace.
3. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the
voltage board . Replace if faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-9

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

Return to Master TOC

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
NA-5 units above code 8300 with
“cold starting”.
The wire feeds up instead of down
when the start button is pressed.
The wire inches up and down properly.

1. Make sure the electrode wire is
fed into the welding tip.
2. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the
voltage board. Replace if faulty.
3. Make sure electrode polarity is
correct and the same as the #67
and #21 leads at terminal strip
(TS1). See wiring diagram.

Return to Section TOC

F-9

4. Make sure the welding power
source is producing welding arc
voltage.

1. Jumper the #2 and #4 leads at
the Lincoln CV power source.
Open circuit voltage should be
present at both the power source
and at the ACTUAL voltmeter
reading on the NA-5. If open circuit voltage is present at the
power source but NOT at the NA5 ACTUAL voltmeter reading perform the #21-#67 External resistance Test.
2. With the start button pressed light
7K should be lit. If it is not the
logic board may be faulty.
3. Check contactor relay 3CR.
Leads #2 and #4 are closed by
relay 3CR. Make sure the relay is
functiioning properly.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

4. Check the control cable between
the power source and the NA-5
control unit. See wiring diagram.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-10

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-10

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
NA-5 units above code 8300 with
1. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the
“cold starting”.
voltage board. Replace if faulty.
While pressing the inch down button
the wire does not stop when it touch- 2. While pressing the inch down butes the work.
ton with the wire touching the
work piece, observe light 7G on
the logic board. If the light goes
on but the wire does NOT stop
feeding the logic board may be
faulty.

The wire will NOT inch up but does
inch down and weld properly.

1. Perform the #21-#67 External
ResistanceTest.
2. Check the continuity of leads
#667 and #621 to the voltage
board. See wiring diagram.
3. The logic board may be faulty.
4. The voltage board may be faulty.

1. With the unit at idle (no buttons
1. Check the inch up switch (button)
pressed) observe lights 1D, on
for proper operation. Also check
the power board, and light 7E, on
associated leads for loose or
the logic board. 1D should be
faulty connections. See wiring
diagram.
ON. 7E should be OFF.
2. If 1D is OFF replace the power
board.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. If 7E is ON replace the logic
board.

The wire feeds UP when either inch
button is pressed.

1. While pressing the inch down but- 1. Check the inch up and inch down
switches (buttons) for proper operton observe light 7E on the logic
board. It should be ON.
ation and wiring. See wiring diagram.
2. If light 7E is ON, while the inch
down button is pressed, the
power board may be faulty.
Replace.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. If light 7E remains OFF, while
the inch down button is pressed,
the logic board may be faulty.
Replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-11

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-11

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS
The wire feeds down when either
inch button is pressed.

1. Wth the unit at idle (no buttons
pressed) observe light 7E on the
logic board. It should be OFF.

1. Check the inch up and inch down
switches (buttons) for proper operation and wiring. See wiring diagram.

2. If light 7E is ON the logic board
may be faulty. Replace.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. If light 7E is OFF the power board
may be faulty. Replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-12

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-12

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The speed and voltage controls do
not function. All of the mode lights
function properly.

1. Check lights 1A and 1B located
1. If lights 1A and /or 1B are OFF
on the power board. They should
perform the DC Power Supply
both be ON.
Test.
2. If both lights 1A and 1B are ON
the control board may be faulty.
Replace.

2. Perform the T1 and T2
Transformer Test.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. The power board may be faulty.
Replace.

All the mode lights function properly. 1. The control board may be faulty.
None of the speed controls operate
Replace.
properly.

All the mode lights function properly. 1. The voltage board may be faulty.
None of the voltage controls operate
Replace.
properly.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-13

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-13

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
Only the strike mode functions, when 1. The logic board may be faulty.
the unit is at idle, regardless of the
Replace.
selector switch position.
2. The procedure board may be
faulty.

Only the strike mode functions while 1. While the unit is welding check
. If light 7D is NOT lit, when weld
welding. The unit stays in the strike
light 7D on the logic board. It
current is present, connect a
mode and does not progress through
should be ON when welding curjumper wire from terminal #528 to
the welding sequence.
rent is present. If light 7D is ON
#500 on terminal strip TS1. See
the logic board may be faulty.
wiring diagram. If light 7D does
light check the CR4 reed switch
3. If light 7D is NOT lit when weld
and associated leads and conneccurrent is present make sure the
tions. See wiring diagram.
weld cables have been properly
routed through the cable clamp
2. If 7D does NOT light, with the
on the left side of the control box.
jumper wire in place, check the
#528 lead and the #500 lead
between the TS1 terminal strip
and the logic board. See wiring
diagram.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. The logic board may be faulty.
Replace.

The strike light is OFF and neither
strike control functions. The other
mode lights work. The unit will not
feed wire when the start button is
pressed.

1. Check light 7D on the logic board. 1. If light 7D is ON check the CR4
If it is off the logic board may be reed switch and associated leads.
See wiring diagram.
faulty. Replace.
2. If the start light is on all the time
the start board (if used) may be
faulty. Replace or install jumper
plug in procedure board.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. If the crater light is on all the time
the crater board (if used) may be
faulty. Replace or install jumper
plug in procedure board.
4. If the weld light is on all the time
the logic board may be faulty.
Replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-14

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-14

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The strike light does not light. The 1. The procedure board may be
strike controls (voltage and wire feed
faulty. Replace.
speed) do function normally.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

The strike light comes on but the
1. The procedure board may be
strike controls (voltage and wire feed
faulty. Replace.
speed) do not function normally.

The start light does not light. The
1. Make sure the start option board
start controls (voltage and wire feed
is installed correctly.
speed) may or may not function normally. The NA-5 is at idle with the
2. The procedure board may be
selector switch in the “Start” position.
faulty. Replace.

1. Check the lead harness between
the start option board and the
procedure board for loose or
faulty connections. See wiring
diagram.

The start light is ON but the start
1. If no other mode lights are lit the 1. Check the lead harness between
controls (voltage and wire feed
start option board may be faulty.
the start option board and the
speed) do not function. The NA-5 is
Replace.
procedure board for loose or
at idle with the selector switch in the
faulty connections. See wiring
“Start” position.
2. If the strike light is also lit (along
diagram.
with the start light) the logic board
may be faulty.
3. If the weld and or crater lights are
also lit (along with the start light)
the procedure board may be
faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-15

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-15

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
When the start button is pressed and 1. Make sure the start option is inthe unit is welding, the start mode is
stalled properly in the NA-5.
skipped.
2. Make sure the start timer is set
for a time greater than zero seconds.

1. Check the lead harness between
the start option boards and the
procedure board for loose or
faulty connections. See wiring
diagram.

3. If the weld light goes ON as soon
as (but not before) the arc is
struck and the start timer is set
for a time greater than zero seconds, the start timer board may
be faulty.
4. If the weld light goes ON before
the arc is struck replace the start
option board with the jumper
plug. If the weld light continues
to go ON before the arc is struck
the logic board may be faulty.
Replace.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

5. With the jumper plug installed: If
the weld light does NOT go ON
until the arc is struck the start
option board may be faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-16

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-16

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
When welding the start timer does
not time out. The unit stays in the
start mode.

1. When the weld is stopped check 1. Check the lead harness between
to see if the crater (if used) or
the start option boards and the
burnback timer is functioning
procedure board for loose or
properly. If the crater and or burnfaulty connections. See wiring
back timer IS functioning properly
diagram.
the start timer may be faulty.
2. If the start, crater and burnback
timers are not working properly
the procedure board may be
faulty.

The crater light does not light. The
crater controls (voltage and wire
feed speed) may or may not function. The NA-5 is at idle with the
selector switch in the ”Crater” postion.

1. Make sure the crater option
boards are installed correctly.
2. The procedure board may be
faulty. Replace.

The crater light is ON but the crater 1. If no other lights are lit the crater
option board may be faulty.
controls (voltage and wire feed
Replace.
speed) do not function. The NA-5 is
at idle with the selector switch in the
“Crater” position.
2. If the strike light is also lit (along
with the crater light) the logic
board may be faulty.

1. Check the lead harness between
the crater option boards and the
procedure board for loose or
faulty connections. See wiring
diagram.

1. Check the lead harness between
the crater option boards and the
procedure board for loose or faulty
connections. See wiring diagram.

3. If the weld and or start lights are
also lit (along with the crater light)
the procedure board may be
faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-17

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-17

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
At the end of the weld the crater light 1. Make sure the crater option is
does NOT light.
installed properly in the NA-5.
2. Make sure the crater timer is set
for a time greater than zero seconds.

1. Check the lead harness between
the crater boards and the procedure board for loose or faulty connections. See wiring diagram.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. The crater option and or timer
board may be faulty. Replace.
4. The logic board may be faulty.

At the end of the weld the crater
timer does not time out. The unit
stays in the crater mode.

1. Replace the crater option board 1. Check the lead harness between
with the jumper plug. Set the
the crater boards and the proceburnback timer for any time
dure board for loose or faulty congreater than zero seconds. If the
nections. See wiring diagram.
unit then stops after the weld and
burnback time, the crater timer
board may be faulty. Replace.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

2. If the unit does not stop the procedure board may be faulty.

No burnback/retract occurs at the
end of the weld.

1. Make sure the burnback timer is
set for a time greater than zero
ohms.

1. Check the lead harness between
the burnback module and the procedure board for loose or faulty
connections.

2. Be sure the jumper leads or dip
switches on the logic board are
comfigured correctly for the burnback/retract desired. See wiring
diagram.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. The burnback timer module may
be faulty. Replace.
4. The procedure board may be
faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-18

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-18

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The burnback timer does not time
out properly.

1. Test if the other timers (start,
1. Check the lead harness between
weld, crater) function properly. If
the burnback module and the prothey time out correctly the burncedure board for loose or faulty
back module may be faulty.
connections.
Replace.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

2. If the other timers (start, weld,
crater) do NOT function correctly
the procedure board may be
faulty.

The weld light does not light. The
1. The procedure board may be
weld controls (voltage and wire feed
faulty. Replace.
speed) may or may not function.
The NA-5 is at idle with the selector
switch in the “Weld” position.

The weld light is ON but the weld
1. If the option boards (start and
controls (voltage and wire feed
crater) are not installed make
speed) do not function. The NA-5 is
sure the jumper plugs are
at idle with the selector switch in the
installed in the procedure board.
“Weld” postion.
2. If the strike light is also lit (along
with the weld light) the logic
board may be faulty.
3. The procedure board may be
faulty. Replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-19

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS
During the welding sequence the
weld light does not go ON.

1. If the optional start timer is
installed determine if the start
mode is timing out. If the
sequence stays in the “start”
mode the start timer may be
faulty.
2. If the start module is OK and the
weld light does not go ON the
logic board may be faulty.
Replace.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-19

3. If a start module is NOT used
make sure the jumper plug is
installled in the procedure board
receptacle.

While welding the weld mode is
omitted in the welding sequence.
The weld timer is set for a longer
time than zero seconds.

1. The weld timer module may be
faulty. Replace.

The weld timer does not time out.
the unit stays in the weld mode.

1. Set the burnback timer for a value 1. Check the lead harness between
greater than zero seconds. Start
the weld timer and the procedure
the weld sequence and then stop
board for loose or faulty connecit with the stop button. Check to
tions.
see if the unit returns to the normal idle state.(Strike light ON and
“Hot Electrode” light OFF).
• If the weld mode ends and
the unit returns to the normal idle state, the weld
timer module may be
faulty.

1. Check the lead harness between
the weld timer and the procedure
board for loose or faulty connections.

• If the unit does NOT return
to the normal idle state the
procedure board may be
faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

F-20

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-20

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The start button does not initiate the 1. If the crater and or start option
1. If light 7C is ON check the stop
power source output or the wire
boards are NOT used the jumper
button and associated leads for
feed. The mode selector switch is in
plugs must be installed in the pro“shorts” or “grounds”. Light 7C
the strike position and the mode
cedure board receptacles.
should be on ONLY when the
strike light is lit.
stop button is pressed.
2. With the unit at idle check light 7C
on the logic board. It should be
2. If light 7B does NOT go on, when
OFF. Also check light 7B on the
the start button is pressed, check
logic board. With the start button
the start switch (button) and assopressed light 7B should go ON. If
ciated leads for loose or faulty
lights 7C and 7B are functioning
connections. See wiring diagram.
normally the logic board may be
faulty.
3. Check the lead harness between
the logic board and the procedure
board for loose or faulty connections. See wiring diagram.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

The start button initiates the power 1. If the wire inches up properly, but 1. If the wire does not feed when the
does not feed when the start butinch up button is pressed perform
source output, but the wire does not
ton is pressed, the logic board
the Wire Drive Motor Test.
feed.
may be faulty.
2. If the wire does NOT feed, when
the inch up button is pressed,
check light 1E on the power
board. It should go ON when the
inch up button is pressed. If light
1E does not go on when the inch
up button is pressed the control
board may be faulty.
3. The power board may be faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-21

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-21

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The start button initiates the wire
feed, but does not activiate the
power source output.

1. Make sure that lead #690 is con- 1. The CR3 relay may be faulty.
nected to the proper pin on the
Check or replace.
logic board. On newer logic
boards the dip switches must be 2. Check the #2 and #4 leads
in the proper position. See wiring
between the CR3 relay and the
diagram.
control cable receptacle. See
wiring diagram.
2. Make sure the power source is
capable of producing welding
output voltage. Jumper #2 and
#4 at the power source’s terminal
strip. This should produce open
circuit voltage at the output terminals. If open circuit voltage is not
present the power source may be
faulty.
3. Check or replace the control
cable between the NA-5 and the
power source.
4. With the start button pressed
check light 7K on the logic board
and the “Electrode Hot” light.
Both lights should be on. If the
lights are OFF unplug the burnback timer. If the problem is
resolved the burnback timer may
be faulty. Replace.
5. The logic board may be faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

F-22

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-22

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

TRAVEL FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The travel function will not operate
regardless of the travel switch position.

1. Check the travel switch for proper 1. With the travel switch (S2) in the
operation. Also check associathand travel position, and the
ed leads for loose or faulty con115VAC input power applied to
nections.
the NA-5 unit, check for 115VAC
at the travel receptacle. 115VAC
2. Check the travel receptacle and
should be present at leads #531
associated leads for loose or
to #532. 115VAC should also be
faulty connections.
present at leads #25 to #531. If
either of these two voltages are
3. Make sure the travel unit is opermissing or not correct check the
ational.
lead harness, switch (S2) and
travel receptacle for loose or
faulty connections. See wiring
diagram.
2. If the above voltages are correct
the problem is in the travel unit or
connecting cable.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

The travel will not function with the
1. Check the travel switch and asso- 1. The travel switch may be faulty.
Check or replace.
travel switch in the “Hand” travel
ciated leads for loose or faulty
position. The unit operates properly
connectioins.
with the travel switch in the “Auto”
position.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-23

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-23

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

TRAVEL FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The travel will not function with the
1. Make sure the jumper leads #691 1. If light 7H, located on the logic
travel switch in the “Auto” postion.
and #692 are connected properly
board, does light when the autoThe travel operates correctly with the
to the correct pins on the logic
matic travel is active check the
travel switch in the “Hand” position.
board. See wiring diagram.
CR2 relay. Normal coil resistance is 10,000 ohms. The con2. Check the travel switch (S2) and
tacts (terminals 2 and 4) should
associated leads for loose or
“close” when 110VDC is applied
faulty connections. See wiring
to the relay coil (terminals 1 +
diagram.
and 3 -).
3. Check light 7H located on the
logic board. This light should be
ON when the “Auto” travel is
active. If light 7H does not light
the logic board may be faulty.

The travel runs continuously when
1. Make sure the jumper leads #691 1. The 2CR relay may be faulty.
the travel switch is in the “Auto” posiand #692 are connected properly
The contacts (terminals 2 and 4)
tion.
to the correct pins on the logic
may be stuck closed.
board. See wiring diagram.
2. Check the associated leads for
2. Check light 7H on the logic board.
misconnections. See wiring diaIf light 7H is always ON the logic
gram.
board may be faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

F-24

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-24

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
After pressing the stop button, the
1. Carefully disconnect the #2 lead 1. The 3CR relay may be faulty.
electrode “Hot” light goes OFF, but
from the power source terminal
The contacts (terminals 2 and 4)
the electrode wire remains electricalstrip. The welding voltage should
may be stuck closed.
ly hot. (The welding voltage is
be disabled. If the welding voltalways present). The wire stops
age is still present the power
2. Check the associated leads for
feeding.
source is faulty.
misconnections. See wiring diagram.
2. Check or replace the control
cable between the power source
and the NA-5 unit.

After pressing the stop button, the
weld light remains on and the wire
continues to feed.

1. If a crater option module is used, 1. If, while pressing the stop button,
check to make sure the logic
light 7C does NOT go on, check
board jumper (#694) is on pin
the stop button and associated
P10.
leads.
2. While pressing the stop button
observe light 7C located on the
logic board. It should be lit. If
light 7C is ON and the wire feeding and welding does not stop,
the logic board may be faulty.

1. Made sure the calibration jumper 1. Remove the drive motor end cap
The set and actual speed meter
on the speedmeter board is conreadings match within a few IPM, but
and the tach cover plate from the
nected properly. See Operation
both are in error.
end of the wire drive motor.
Section.
Check to make sure the slotted
disc is secure and aligned and
rotates freely through the center
of the module pick-up.
2. Perform the Wire Speed
Accuracy Test

4. The control board may be faulty.
Replace.
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. Perform the Meter Circuit
Accuracy Test.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-25

F-25

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The set speed and actual speed
1. Contact your local Lincoln
1. Check the lead and switch contimeter readings do not match within a
Authorized Field Service Facility.
nuity of the SET speedmeter cirfew IPM. One or both readings may
cuit. See wiring diagram.
be erratic.
2. Check the lead and switch continuity of the ACTUAL speedmeter
circuit. See wiring diagram.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. Perform the Wire Speed
Accuracy Test
4. Perform the Meter Circuit
Accuracy Test.
5. The control board may be fault

The set speed is adjustable and
steady. The actual speed is uncontrollable. The meter displays the
actual speed correctly.

1. Contact your local Lincoln
Authorized Field Service Facility.

1. While the motor is running carefully unplug the 15 pin molex from
the control board.
A. If the motor continues to
run the power board may
be faulty. Replace.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

B. If the motor stops the
control board may be
faulty. Replace.
2. Perform the Wire Drive Motor
Test.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

F-26

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The set speed is adjustable and
1. Check that the jumper plug is
steady. The actual speed reading is
installed securely in the harness
incorrect and or erratic.
receptacle near the voltage
board. Codes below 8300 only.

1. Remove the drive motor end cap
and the tach cover plate from the
end of the wire drive motor.
Check to make sure the slotted
disc is secure and aligned and
2. Check for loose or faulty connecrotates freely through the center
tions on leads #510A, #525A and
of the module pick-up.
#555 between the tach receptacle
and the control board.
2. Perform the Tach Board
Feedback Test.
3. Check the tach cable from the
tach board to the tach receptacle. 3. If the Tach Board Feedback
The shield in the cable should
Test is OK the control board may
NOT be grounded to the case.
be faulty. Replace.

The set volts and actual volts readings match within a few tenths of a
volt while welding. However both
readings are inaccurate.

1. Put the Lincoln power source in
the machine control mode.
Check to see if the power supply
can be set for the arc voltage
required for the process. If not,
the power source may be faulty.
2. The control cable may be faulty.
Check or replace.

Return to Section TOC

F-26

1. Check the voltage sensing leads
for continuity. (zero ohms). #21
should have continuity to the
work piece and #67 should have
continuity to the wire feed head
assembly. See wiring diagram.
2. Perform the Voltmeter Accuracy
Test.
3. Perform the Meter Circuit
Accuracy Test.
4. The voltage board may be faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-27

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-27

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The actual volts reading does NOT
match the set volts reading within a
few tenths of a volt. One reading
may be erratic. The NA-5 does not
shut off.

1. NA-5 units with a G1556-2 (or
1. If the actual reading is the probhigher) voltage board do not conlem check the actual volts switch
trol the actual strike voltage to
and associated leads. See wiring
match the set strike voltage. The
diagram.
actual strike voltage is a function
of the set strike voltage and the
2. If the set reading is the problem
OCV contrtol characteristics of
check the set volts switch and the
the welding power source.
asociated leads. See wiring diagram.
NA-5 controls with a G1556-3 (or
higher) voltage board must have 3. Perform the Voltmeter Accuracy
the jumper plug connected to the
Test
4-cavity receptacle on the board,
unless the pulsed power filter
4. Perform the Meter Circuit
board option is connected.
Accuraty Test.
2. Make sure the shutdown
5. The voltage board may be faulty.
“BYPASS” pins are not jumpered
together on the NA-5 voltage
board.
3. Check the voltage sensing leads
for continuity. (zero ohms). #21
lead should have continuity to the
work piece and #67 lead should
have continuity to the wire feed
head assembly. See wiring diagram.
4. Put the Lincoln welding power
source in the machine control
mode. Check to see if the power
supply can be set for the arc voltage required for the process. If
not, the power supply may be
faulty.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-28

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-28

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The NA-5 repeatedly shutsdown
while welding.

1. Make sure the power source
polarity switch is set for the correct electrode polarity.

1. Perform the Out of Voltage
Range Shutdown Test.
2. The voltage board may be faulty.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

2. Make sure the #67 and #21 leads
are connected to the TS1 terminal strip for the correct electrode
polarity. See wiring diagram.
3. Make certain the voltage control
switch on the Lincoln CV power
source is set in the “Remote”
position.
4. Make sure the #21 lead has continuity (zero ohms) to the work
piece.
5. Make sure the #67 lead has continuity (zero ohms) to the wire
feed head assembly.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

6. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the
NA-5 voltage board. Replace if
faulty.
7. The control cable may be faulty.
Check or replace.
8. Be sure the welding power
source is compatable with the
NA-5.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-29

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The circuit breaker trips when the
inch up, inch down, or start buttons
are pressed.

1. The power board may be faulty.
Replace.

1. Perform the Wire Drive Motor
Test.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

2. Perform the DC Power Supply
Test.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-29

The circuit breaker trips and or the
1. Contact your Local Lincoln
1. If fuse F101 or the circuit breakerfuse (F101) blows when the NA-5 is
Authorized Field Service Facility.
immediately fails when input
turned on. (input power applied).
power is applied, unplug all of
the PC boards except the power
board. If the fuse still fails the
power board may be faulty. If
the fuse does not fail reconnect
the PC boards one at a time until
the faulty board is located. Also
check and inspect the wiring harness for “short” or “grounds”.
Reconnect the PC boards in the
following order: control,
voltage,logic,procedure,optiontimer, remote interface,speedmeter and voltmeter.
NOTE: Some of the above PC
boards are optional and may not
be used in all NA-5 control units.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-30

F-30

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The circuit breaker trips after the
1. Check to make sure there are not 1. Perform the DC Power Supply
wire has been feeding for a period of
any mechanical restrictions in the
Test.
time. Welding is normal.
wire feeding path which could
cause excessive loading on the
2. Perform the Wire Drive Motor
wire drive motor.
Test.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. The power board may be faulty.

The 1/8 amp fuse on the voltage
board repeatedly fails.

1. Check to make sure the PC
1. Remove the input power to the
boards are NOT grounded to the
NA-5 and replace the 1/8 amp
case of the NA-5. This can hapfuse. Locate and remove the #21
pen due to metallic dust build-up.
and #67 leads from the TS1 terminal strip.
A. Make a resistance check
from the following leads
to the NA-5 case grounding screw. Lead #510A,
510P, 500, 515 and 525.
B. The resistances should
be above 1000 ohms. If
any tests are below 1000
ohms that circuit has low
resistance to case
ground. Isolate faulty
leads or PC board. See
wiring diagram and
schematic.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-31

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-31

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

STARTING/WELDING PROBLEMS
The arc voltage appears to rise too 1. Increase the strike and or start
slowly. The wire stubs or blasts off
voltage settings.
at the start of the weld sequence.
Once the arc is established the weld- 2. Put the output control switch (on
ing is OK.
the power source) in the
“Machine Control” position.
Jumper the “BYPASS “ pins on
the NA-5 voltage board. Control
the arc voltage from the power
source. If the problem is NOT
remedied the power source may
be at fault. If the problem is
solved the NA-5 may be at fault.

1. The voltage board may be faulty.
Replace.

3. If the start response jumper, on
the voltage board, is in the “B”
position, change to the “A” position. If the “A” position cures the
starting problem the voltage
board may be faulty.

The voltage seems too high or flares 1. Decrease the strike and or start
voltage settings.
excessively at the start of the weld
sequence. Once the arc is estab2. Put the output control switch (on
lished the welding is OK.
the power source) in the
“Machine Control” position.
Jumper the “BYPASS” pins on
the voltage board. Control the
arc voltage from the power
source. If the problem is NOT
remedied the power source may
be at fault. If the problem is
solved the NA-5 may be at fault.

1. The voltage board may be faulty.
Replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-32

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WELDING PROBLEMS
The arc is unstable or oscillating.

1. Check the welding cables for
loose or faulty connections.

1. The NA-5 voltage board may be
faulty. Replace.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

2. Make sure the electrode and gas
(if used) is correct for the process
being used.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-32

3. Put the output control switch (on
the power source) in the
“Machine Control” position.
Jumper the “BYPASS “ pins on
the NA-5 voltage board. Control
the arc voltage from the power
source. If the problem is NOT
remedied the power source may
be at fault. If the problem is
solved the NA-5 may be at fault.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-33

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-33

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

FUNCTION PROBLEMS
The flux or gas/water solenoid does
not function (open).

1. Make sure the switch on the flux
hopper is in the ON position.

1. If light 7G, located on the logic
board, does light when the flux
(gas/water) solenoid is normally
2. Check light 7G located on the
active, check the CR1 relay.
logic board. This light should be
Normal coil resistance is 10,000
on when the flux valve would norohms. The contacts (terminals 2
mally be active. If light 7G does
and 4) should “close” when
not light the logic board may be
110VDC is applied to the relay coil
faulty.
(terminals 1 + and 3 -).
2. Check the wiring harness for
loose or faulty connections
between the CR1 relay, the logic
board, the TS2 terminal strip and
the flux receptacle. See wiring
diagram.

The flux or gas/water solenoid continuously remains open.

1. Check light 7G located on the
1. Check the CR1 relay. The conlogic board. This light should be
tacts (terminal 2 and 4) should
lit only when the flux valve would
“close” only when 110VDC is
normally be active. If light 7G is
applied to the relay coil. (termilit continuously the logic board
nals 1+ and 3-). If the contacts
may be faulty.
are “closed” continuously replace
the CR1 relay.
2. Check to make sure the solenoid
is not stuck in the open position.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-34

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WELDING PROBLEMS
The arc is unstable or oscillating.

1. Check the welding cables for
loose or faulty connections.

1. The NA-5 voltage board may be
faulty Replace.

2. Make sure the electrode and gas
(if used) is correct for the process
being used.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-34

3. Put the Lincoln power source in
the machine control
mode.Jumper the “BYPASS” pins
on the NA-5 voltage board.
Adjust the weld voltage at the
power source for the process
being used. If the problem is
NOT resolved the power source
may be faulty.

The welding arc is variable or “hunt- 1. Make sure the welding parameing”.
ters are correct for the welding
procedure being used.

3. Check the wire feeding path for
restrictions.

1. Put the Lincoln power source in
the machine control mode.
Jumper the “BYPASS” pins on the
NA-5 voltage board. Adjust the
weld voltage at the power source
for the process being used. If the
problem is resolved check or
replace the control cable or the
NA-5 voltage board may be faulty.

4. The contact tip may be worn.
Check or replace.

2. Perform the Wire Drive Motor
Test.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

2. Check the welding cables forloose or faulty connections.

5. The welding power source may
be faulty. Check or replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-35

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-35

Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual

PROBLEMS
(SYMPTOMS)

POSSIBLE AREAS OF
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)

RECOMMENDED
COURSE OF ACTION

WELDING PROBLEMS
Poor arc striking with sticking or
1. Make sure the welding parame“blast offs”. The weld bead is ropey
ters (voltages and wire feed
and has porosity.
speed) and techniques are correct for the welding procedure
being used.
2. Check the welding cables for
loose or faulty connections.

1. Put the Lincoln power source in
the machine control mode.
Jumper the “BYPASS” pins on the
NA-5 voltage board. Adjust the
weld voltage at the power source
for the process being used. If the
problem is resolved check or
replace the control cable or the
NA-5 voltage board may be faulty.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. The contact tip may be worn.
Check or replace.
4. The welding power source may
be faulty. Check or replace.

CAUTION
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

F-36

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
PC BOARD LED (LIGHT) DEFINITIONS
LED Number

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-36

Functions Indicated By PC Board LEDS

1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F

+15VDC Analog Supply Present
-10VDC Analog Supply Present
Down Field Voltage Applied
Up Field Voltage Applied
Armature Voltage Applied
115VDC Relay Supply Present

7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7G
7H
7J
7K

+15VDC Logic Supply Present
"Start" Switch Pressed
"Stop" Switch Pressed
Welding Current Present
Signal to Apply Down Field Voltage
Signal to Operate Flux or Water Solenoid
Signal to Operate Travel Circuit
"Inch Down" Switch Pressed
Signal to Operate Power Source Output Contactor

LED LIGHT LOCATIONS

LED LIGHT LOCATIONS

NA-5 L OGI C
LED 1E
LED 7B

LED 7E

LED 1D

LED 7D

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

LED 1C

LED 7J

LED 7C

LED 1A
LED 1B

LED7A

LED 1F
LED 7K LED 7G

LED 7H

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

NA-5 POWER

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-37

F-37

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
PC BOARD LED (LIGHT) SEQUENCE TABLE ABOVE CODE 8300

INDICATOR LIGHTS
Light
No.

CONDITIONS FOR LIGHT "ON"

Location
(PC Board)

Idle
Mode

"Inch Up" "Inch Down" "Start"
Switch
Switch
Switch
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed

1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F

Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON

7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7G
7H
7J
7K

Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic

ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON

ON

ON
ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON

ON

ON

ON
ON*

"Stop"
Switch
Pressed

Burnback
Mode

Weld Arc
Establish

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON
ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON
ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON*
ON
ON*

ON
ON
ON**

ON**

ON
ON
ON
ON

ON

ON

ON

ON*

ON* only while switch is pressed

ON** dependent on travel mode

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-38

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
DC POWER SUPPLY TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This will help determine if the power and logic boards are supplying the correct DC voltages
to the NA-5 circuitry.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 16 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16" Nutdriver
Volt/Ohmmeter (Multimeter)
Wiring diagram

NA-5

F-38

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-39

DC POWER SUPPLY TEST (continued)
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. Locate the power, logic, voltage,
control and procedure boards. See
Figure F.1
4. Apply 115VAC to the NA-5 wire
feeder at the correct pins. See
wiring diagram.

5. Perform the power supply checks as
described in Table F.1 If any of the
readings are incorrect (out of range)
or missing the power or logic board
may be faulty. See wiring diagram.
Note: Do not unplug the molex connectors.
Also check associated leads and
plugs for loose or faulty connections.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

POWER
BOARD

Return to Section TOC

F-39

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

VOLTAGE
BOARD

LOGIC
BOARD

CONTROL
BOARD

PROCEDURE
BOARD

FIGURE F.1 P.C. BOARD LOCATIONS
NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-40

F-40

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
DC POWER SUPPLY TEST (continued)
TABLE F.1 DC POWER SUPPLY CHECKS

CHECK POINT
LOCATION

TEST
DESCRIPTION

CONNECTOR
PLUG PIN NO.

LEAD NO.

NORMAL
ACCEPTABLE
VOLTAGE
READING

CONTROL PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG

CHECK +15VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER BOARD
TO
CONTROL BOARD

PIN 10 +
PIN 9 -

525 +
510 -

14.0 - 16.0 VDC

525 +
510 -

14.0 - 16.0 VDC

500 510 +

9.0 - 11.0 VDC

500 510 +

9.0 - 11.0 VDC

610 +
500 -

90 - 135 VDC

510 -

525 +

VOLTAGE PC
BOARD 12 PIN
CONNECTOR
PLUG

CHECK +15VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER BOARD
TO
VOLTAGE BOARD

PIN 3 +
PIN 7 -

510 -

525 +

VOLTAGE PC
BOARD 12 PIN
CONNECTOR
PLUG

CHECK -10VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER BOARD
TO
VOLTAGE BOARD

PIN 6 PIN 7+

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

510 +
500 -

CONTROL PC
BOARD
CONNECTOR
PLUG

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

LOGIC PC
BOARD J1
CONNECTOR
PLUG

CHECK -10VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER BOARD
TO
CONTROL BOARD

CHECK +110VDC
SUPPLY FROM
POWER BOARD
TO
LOGIC BOARD

PIN 14 PIN 9 +
510 +
500 -

PLUG J1 PIN 1+
PLUG J1 PIN 2 610 +
500 -

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-41

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-41

DC POWER SUPPLY TEST (continued)
TABLE F.1 DC POWER SUPPLY CHECKS (continued)
CHECK POINT
LOCATION

PROCEDURE
PC BOARD
J19 CONNECTOR
PLUG

TEST
DESCRIPTION

CONNECTOR
PLUG PIN NO.

LEAD NO.

CHECK +15VDC
SUPPLY FROM
LOGIC BOARD
TO
PROCEDURE BOARD

PLUG J19
PIN 5 +

515 +

PLUG J19
PIN 15 -

500 -

NORMAL
ACCEPTABLE
VOLTAGE
READING

14.0 - 16.0 VDC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

515 +

500 -

VOLTMETER
BOARD

SPEEDMETER
BOARD

1.

CHECK +5VDC
SUPPLY
PRODUCED
ON THE
VOLTMETER
BOARD

CHECK +5VDC
SUPPLY
PRODUCED
ON THE
SPEEDMETER
BOARD

TEST POINT1.
TP5 +

TP5 +
4.75 - 5.25 VDC

TEST POINT1.
510P -

LEAD 510P -

TEST POINT1.
TP5 +

TP5 +

TEST POINT1.
510P -

LEAD 510P -

Scrape encapsulation from test points.

NA-5

4.75 - 5.25 VDC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-42

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
T1 and T2 TRANSFORMER TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will help the technician to determine if the T1 and/or T2 transformers are functioning
properly.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
115VAC power supply
Volt-Ohmmeter (Multimeter)
5/16" Nutdriver
Slot head screwdriver

NA-5

F-42

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-43

F-43

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
T1 and T2 TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)
PROCEDURE
1. Remove all input power to the NA-5.
2. Using 5/16" nutdriver open the control box PC board access door.

5. Using the 115VAC supply carefully
apply 115VAC to the T1 primary
leads #531B and #532.
6. Check for approximately 10VAC at
the yellow secondary leads (#601
and #602). See wiring diagram.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. Locate the T1 and T2 transformers.
See Figure F.2
4. Locate and remove the two sets of
primary leads (#531B and #532)
from the upper terminal strip TS2.
Label leads for reassembly. See
wiring diagram and Figure F.2

POWER
BOARD

UPPER
TERMINAL
STRIP

LOGIC
BOARD

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

T1 TRANSFORMER
T2 TRANSFORMER

FIGURE F.2 T1 AND T2 TRANSFORMERS
NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-44

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
T1 and T2 TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)
7. Check for approximately 22VAC at
the blue secondary leads. The blue
secondary leads are connected to
the logic board. See wiring diagram.
8. Check for approximately 18VAC at
the white to red leads. The white
and red leads are connected to the
power board. See wiring diagram.
9. Check for approximately 36VAC at
the red to red leads. Both red leads
are also connected to the power
board. See wiring diagram.
10. If all the secondary voltages are
correct the T1 transformer is functioning properly.
11. If any or all of the secondary voltages are low or not present the T1
transformer may be faulty.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

14. Check for approximately 24VAC at
the brown secondary leads. See
wiring diagram.
15. If all the secondary voltages are
correct the T2 transformer is functioning properly.
16. If any or all of the secondary voltages are low or not present the T2
transformer may be faulty.
17. Reconnect the primary leads
(#531B and #532) to the TS2 terminal strip.
18. Close and secure the access door.

12. Using the 115VAC supply carefully
apply 115VAC to the T2 primary
leads #531B and #532.

Return to Section TOC

13. Check for approximately 115VAC
at the orange secondary leads.
The orange leads are connected to
the power board. See wiring diagram.

NA-5

F-44

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-45

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
VOLTAGE BOARD TRANSFORMER TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will aid the technician in determining if the transformer on the voltage board is functioning properly.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16" Nutdriver
Phillips head screwdriver
115VAC power supply
Volt/Ohmmeter

NA-5

F-45

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-46

VOLTAGE BOARD TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)
TEST PROCEDURE

4. Remove the molex type plugs from
the voltage board.

1. Remove all input power to the NA-5.
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.

5. Using the phillips head screwdriver
remove the voltage board from the
control box.
6. Locate the transformer and test
points on the voltage board. See
Figure F.4

Return to Master TOC

3. Locate the voltage board. See
Figure F.3

Return to Section TOC

F-46

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

VOLTAGE
BOARD

FIGURE F.3 VOLTAGE BOARD LOCATION

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-47

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
VOLTAGE BOARD TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)

{

PIN #9
PIN #8

NA-5
VOLTAGE
G1556-[ ]

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

24VAC
SECONDARY
TEST POINTS

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

VOLTAGE BOARD
TRANSFORMER

FIGURE F.4 TRANSFORMER TEST POINTS
7. Using the 115VAC supply carefully
apply 115VAC to pins #8 and #9 in
the nine pin molex plug cavity on the
voltage board. See Figure F.4
Make sure the board and leads are
insulated from each other and any
metal conductors.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

8. Using the voltmeter check for
approximately 24VAC at the secondary test points. See Figure F.4
Note: The secondary voltage will vary
with the input primary voltage. The
insulating material will have to be
removed from the secondary test
points to insure that the meter probes
make good electrical contact.
9. If the secondary voltage is correct
the transformer is functioning properly.
NA-5

10. If the secondary voltage is low or
not present the transformer may be
faulty.
11. Carefully remove the 115VAC supply from the voltage board.
12. Install the voltage board and connect the molex plugs.
13. Close and secure the access door.

F-47

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-48

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE FEED DRIVE MOTOR TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will determine if the wire drive motor is able to function when supplied with the correct voltages..

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 17 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
Variable DC voltage supply 0 to 90 VDC
Isolated DC voltage supply 0 to 120 VDC
Volt/Ohmeter

NA-5

F-48

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-49

WIRE FEED DRIVE MOTOR TEST (Continued)
TEST PROCEDURE

MOTOR APPLIED
VOLTAGE TEST

1. Remove the wire feed motor connector from the NA-5 control box.
2. Using the ohmmeter, measure the
resistances per the table below. Also
see Figure F.5.

Return to Master TOC

3. If the motor resistance test is good,
proceed to the Motor Applied Voltage
Test.
Return to Section TOC

F-49

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

MOTOR
CONNECTOR
PINS

4. The motor should run, and the speed
should vary with changes to the
armature voltage.

#541
E

F

5. If the motor does NOT run and
change speed correctly, the motor or
gear box may be faulty.

A
B

D
C

#539

#627

2. Carefully connect the variable 0 to 90
VDC supply (SUPPLY TURNED
OFF) to pins A and B on the motor
connector. (See Table F.1.)
3. Apply field voltage first (pins C and
D) to the motor. Then, slowly apply
the armature voltage to pins A and B.
(See Table F.1).

FIGURE F.5 WIRE FEED DRIVE MOTOR
CONNECTOR PINS.

#67

1. Carefully connect the isolated 120
VDC supply (SUPPLY TURNED
OFF) to pins C and D on the motor
connector.

6. To stop the motor, REMOVE THE
ARMATURE VOLTAGE FIRST (pins
A and B).

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

#626

TEST POINTS

RESISTANCE

DC VOLTAGE

Lead #539 to lead #541
armature

4 to 5 ohms

0 to 90 VDC

Lead #626 to lead #627
field winding

750 to 850 ohms

90 to 120 VDC

All leads
to
motor shell
(Except lead #67)

500,000 ohms
min.

NONE

Lead #67 to motor
shell

zero ohms

Not Applicable

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-50

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
EXTERNAL RESISTANCE TEST (LEADS #21 AND #67)

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will help the technician to determine if the external voltage sensing leads are connected properly and intact.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 8 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
Volt-Ohmmeter (Multimeter)
5/16" Nutdriver
3/4" wrench
Wiring diagram

NA-5

F-50

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-51

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
EXTERNAL RESISTANCE TEST (LEADS #21 AND #67) (Continued)
PROCEDURE
1. Make sure the electrode wire is fed
through the wire contact assembly
tip but NOT touching the "work"
piece.

6. Using the ohmmeter check the resistances per the following table F.2
7. Reconnect the welding cable leads
to the contact assembly.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

2. Disconnect input power to the NA-5.
3. Make sure the drive motor cable and
power source control cables are
properly connected to the NA-5 control box.

8. If any of the resistances are not correct per Table F.2 check the associated leads, cables and circuits for
"opens" or "shorts". See wiring diagram.

4. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.

9. Close and secure the control box
access door.

5. Locate the TS1 terminal strip. See
wiring diagram.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

TABLE F.2 EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SENSING LEADS TEST POINTS
TEST POINTS

EXPECTED
RESISTANCES

COMMENTS AND
CONDITIONS

Lead #667
to
Electrode wire

Zero or less than
1 ohm

Electrode wire must be in
contact assembly tip

Lead #621 to
work piece

Zero or less than
1 ohm

Polarity switches must be
in the correct positions

Lead #667 to
#621

Greater than 15K
ohms

Using the 3/4" wrench
disconnect the welding
cable(s) from the
contact assembly

NA-5

F-51

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-52

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE SHUT DOWN TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the out-of-voltage range shut down circuitry is functioning properly.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 18 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16" Nutdriver
Jumper wire
Lincoln CV Power Source

NA-5

F-52

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-53

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE SHUT DOWN TEST (Continued)
TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the NA-5
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.

4. Connect to a Lincoln Electric CV
power source per connection diagram. See the Installation section
of this manual.

3. Locate the voltage PC board.
Jumper together the "BYPASS" and
“Common” pins on the NA-5 voltage
PC board. See Figure F.6 (On older
voltage boards these pins may be
labeled "B"). This should disable the
shut down circuit.

COM

NA-5
VOLTAGE
G1556-[ ]

AUTO

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

JUMPER
TOGETHER
BYPASS

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

1/8 AMP FUSE

FIGURE F.6 VOLTAGE BOARD AND PIN LOCATIONS
NA-5

F-53

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-54

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
OUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE SHUT DOWN TEST (Continued)
5. Start welding and observe the
ACTUAL voltage reading on the NA5 digital meter. The actual voltage
must match the SET voltage within
+/- 0.5VDC. If it does NOT, the NA5 is designed to shut down.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

6. If the NA-5 continues to shut down
with the "BYPASS" pins jumpered
together, the voltage PC board may
be faulty.
7. If the ACTUAL voltage reading is
zero, the sensing leads may be
faulty.
Perform the External
Resistance Test. Also check the
1/8 amp fuse on the voltage PC
board.
8. Check the polarity switche in the
Lincoln power source and its associated leads. Set the switches to the
same polarity as the electrode. See
the Wiring Diagram.

NA-5

9. If the ACTUAL voltage reading is different from the SET voltage reading,
the power source may not be capable of producing the required arc
voltage, the control cable may be
faulty or misconnected, or the NA-5
voltage PC board may be faulty.
10. After all tests are complete, remove
the input power to the wire feeder
and remove the jumper wire you
placed on the "BYPASS' pins on
the voltage PC board. Close and
secure the access door.

F-54

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-55

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
TACH BOARD FEEDBACK TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This procedure will aid the technician to determine if the tach board is functioning properly.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 10 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16" Nutdriver
Phillips head screwdriver
Analog volt/ohmmeter (Multimeter)
Wiring diagram

NA-5

F-55

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-56

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
TACH BOARD FEEDBACK TEST (Continued)
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.
3. Locate leads #510A, #525A and
#555 on the control board.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

4. Apply 115VAC to the NA-5 wire
feeder at the correct pins. See
wiring diagram.
5. Check leads #525A(+) to #510A(-)
for the presence of 15VDC. This is
the supply voltage from the control
PC board to the tach PC board. If
the voltage is present, proceed to
the next step. If the voltage is missing check the associated wiring and
then perform the DC Power Supply
Test.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

6. With the motor running (activate
either inch switches or the start
switch) and check leads #555(+) to
#510A(-) for the presence of

NA-5

between 4.5 - 10.5VDC. (The motor
must be running.) This is the feedback voltage from the tach PC board
to the control PC board. This voltage is dependent upon motor speed.
7. If the feedback voltage is missing or
does not vary with motor speed, the
tach PC board may be faulty. Also
check for loose or faulty connections.
8. After the completion of the tests
remove the 115VAC power and
close and secure the access door.

F-56

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-57

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
VOLTMETER ACCURACY TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the NA-5 voltmeter is providing accurate readings.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 10 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
Digital volt/ohmmeter with at least 3-1/2 digits and +/-0.5% accuracy

NA-5

F-57

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-58

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
VOLTMETER ACCURACY TEST (Continued)
TEST PROCEDURE
Perform the following checks with the
NA-5 connected to a Lincoln CV welding power source according to the proper connection diagram. See the
Installation Section of this manual.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

1. Connect the test voltmeter (see
Materials Needed) between the
"work" and the electrode cable connection at the welding head. See
Figure F.7
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.

3. Place a jumper wire between leads
#2 and #4 located on CR3 relay.
See Figure F.8 This this should
energize the output terminals of the
Lincoln CV welding power source.
An open circuit voltage should be
present at the welding output terminals. The test voltmeter reading
should match the ACTUAL volts
meter reading on the NA-5 within +/0.5VDC (typically +/- 0.2VDC). If it
does not, check the integrity and
placement
of
the
voltage
sensing leads #21 and #67 and
associated wiring. Perform the
Meter Circuit Accuracy Test.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

ELECTRODE CABLES

CONNECT VOLTMETER
TO ELECTRODE
CONNECTION
POINT
FIGURE F.7 TEST METER CONNECTION POINTS
NA-5

F-58

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

F-59

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
VOLTMETER ACCURACY TEST (Continued)

CR3 RELAY

FIGURE F.8 CR3 RELAY
4. Remove the jumper wire from leads
#2 and #4.
5. Remove the test voltmeter and,
while welding, compare the SET
volts and ACTUAL volts meter readings. Depending upon the arc voltage characteristics of the process
being welded, the ACTUAL reading
may vary somewhat about an average value. The average ACTUAL
reading should match the SET reading within +/- 0.5 VDC. If not, refer
to the Meter Circuit Accuracy Test.
6. If no further tests are required,
remove all test equipment and close
and secure the access door.

NA-5

F-59

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-60

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the NA-5 is providing the proper wire feed per inches of revolution of the drive roll.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
Ruler or other linear measuring device
5/16" Nutdriver

NA-5

F-60

F-61

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST (Continued)

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-61

TEST PROCEDURE
Perform the following checks with the
NA-5 connected to a Lincoln CV welding power source according to the proper connection diagram. See the
Installation Section of this manual.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

1. Check to make sure the speedmeter
calibration jumper is connected to
the proper calibration pin for the
head and drive roll system being
used. See Table F.3
TABLE F.3
SPEEDMETER
CALIBRATION

HEAD
RATIO

DRIVE ROLL
PART NUMBER

WIRE SIZE RANGE

RATED SPEED
RANGE (IPM)

21*

21/1

S12778
S19113

Single .035 - .052 Solid
Single .045 - .052 Cored

100 - 2070

57F**
57**

57/1
57/1

S12778
S12515

Single .035 - .052
Single 1/16 - 3/32

40 - 778
38 - 762

95

95/1

S12514

Single 3/32 - 5/32

22 - 428

95S***

95/1

S12515
S19113
S13161-052
S13161-5/64
S14904 (Outer)
S14905 (Inner)

Single 1/16 - 3/32
Single .045 - .052 Cored
Twin .045 -.052
Twin 1/16 - 5/64
Twin 3/32

23 - 456

142

142/1

S12514

Single 3/32 - 7/32

15 - 289

142T***

142/1

S14904 (Outer)
S14905 (Inner)

Twin 5/64 - 1/8

15 - 300

* Present on HI -Speed NA-5 speedmeter board only. ** Early speedmeter pins were labeled 55F and 55,
respectively.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

*** Early speedmeter PC boards did not include these calibration pins.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-62

F-62

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST (Continued)
2. Check for the proper wire feed inches per revolution of the drive roll.
A. Set the Strike speed control to
any setting between 50 and 125
IPM. While pressing the INCH
DOWN button measure the precise length of wire fed by exactly
10 revolutions of the drive roll.
The measured length should be
within the range specified in
Table F.4 for the drive roll and
wire size employed.

B. If the measured length is not
within the specified lengths
there may be a problem with the
wire or wire feeding path. See
the Troubleshooting Guide
(Feeding Problems) in this section of the manual. Also check
for correct drive roll tension
adjustment.

TABLE F.4
DRIVE ROLL PART
NUMBER

WIRE SIZE RANGE

INCHES OF WIRE FED PER
10 REVOLUTIONS OF
DRIVE ROLL

S12778

Single .035 - .052 Solid

53 - 54

S19113

Single .045 - .052 Cored

53 - 55

S12515

Single 1/16 - 3/32

51 - 53

S12514

Single 3/32 - 5/32

49 - 51

S13161-052

Twin .045 - .052

53 - 55

S13161-5/64

Twin 1/16 - 5/64

53 - 55

S14904 (Outer)
S14905 (Inner)

Twin 3/32

51 - 52

S12514

Single 3/32 - 7/32

49 - 52

S14904 (Outer)
S14905 (Inner)

Twin 5/64 - 1/8

51 - 53

NA-5

F-63

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST (Continued)

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-63

3. Check for the proper drive roll revolutions per minute. (RPM)
A. Adjust the STRIKE speed control to obtain the SET speed
specified for the speedmeter
calibration pin and head ratio
specified per Table F.5 While
pressing the INCH down button
count the drive roll revolutions in
60 seconds. The drive roll revolutions and actual speed reading
should match Table F.5

B. If the readings do not match the
number in Table F.5 refer to the
Meter Circuit Accuracy Test.

TABLE F.5
SPEEDMETER
CALIBRATION
PIN

HEAD
RATIO

SET SPEEDMETER
READING (IPM)
READING (IPM)

DRIVE ROLL
RPM

ACTUAL
SPEEDMETER

21*

21/1

0.27 (IPM X 1000)

50 +/- 2

0.27 +/- 0.01
(IPM X 1000)

57F**

57/1

268

50 +/- 1

268 +/- 2

57**

57/1

262

50 +/- 1

262 +/- 2

95

95/1

249

50 +/- 1

249 +/- 2

95S***

95/1

265

50 +/- 1

265 +/- 2

142

142/1

250

50 +/- 1

250 +/- 2

142T***

142/1

260

50 +/- 1

260 +/- 2

* Present on HI -Speed NA-5 speedmeter board only. ** Early speedmeter pins were labeled 55F and 55,
respectively.
*** Early speedmeter PC boards did not include these calibration pins.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-64

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test will help determine if the NA-5 meter circuit is functioning properly.
The Speed Meter Circuit tests take approximately 15 minutes to perform.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

The Volt Meter Circuit tests take approximately 15 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
Digital volt/ohmmeter with at least 3-1/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy
5/16" Nutdriver

NA-5

F-64

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-65

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)
5. Test for AC supply to the voltmeter PC board.

TEST PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.

• Check for 8 to 11VAC from lead
#601 to #602. See Figure F.9

2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.

Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate voltmeter readings. If the correct AC voltage is not present check for
loose or faulty connects with the associated leads. See wiring diagram.

3. Locate the voltmeter PC board. See
Figure F.9

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

4. Apply input power to the NA-5.

517
518

TP4

601
510C

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

510

602

TP5

L6685-[ ] METER

FIGURE F.9 VOLTMETER PC BOARD AND TEST POINTS
NA-5

F-65

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-66

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)
6. Test for DC volts on the voltmeter
PC board.
• Check for 4.75 to 5.25VDC from
TP5 to lead #510C. See Figure
F.9

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate voltmeter readings.
• If the display is NOT lit and the
correct DC voltage is present at
TP5 to lead #510C, the digital
meter may be faulty. Replace the
meter.
• If the AC voltage IS present at
leads #601 to #602 and the DC
voltage is missing, the voltmeter
PC board may be faulty.

7. Test Digital Voltmeter Accuracy
• Use a test meter with at least 31/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.
• Connect the + probe to TP4 and
the - probe to lead 510C. Do NOT
disconnect plug.
Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate meter readings.
• With the NA-5 voltmeter reading
SET values of STRIKE voltage,
adjust the strike voltage control
until the test meter matches the
settings in the table below.
• If the NA-5 digital voltmeter does
not match the readings, the digital
meter may be faulty.

NA-5 SET VOLTS READING

TEST VOLTMETER READING

15.0VDC
30.0VDC
60.0VDC

.150 +/- .004VDC
.300 +/- .004VDC
.600 +/- .006 VDC

NA-5

F-66

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-67

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)
8. Test Voltmeter PC Board Accuracy
• Use a test meter with at least 31/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.
• Connect the + probe to lead #517
and the - probe to lead #510C.
Do not disconnect plug.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate meter readings.
• With the NA-5 voltmeter reading
SET values of STRIKE voltage,
adjust the strike voltage control
until the NA-5 voltmeter matches
the settings in the table below.
• If the test meter does not match
the readings, the voltmeter PC
board may be faulty.

NA-5 SET VOLTS READING

TEST VOLTMETER READING

15.0VDC
30.0VDC
60.0VDC

1.50VDC +/- .04
3.00VDC +/- .04
6.00VDC +/- .06

NA-5

F-67

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-68

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)
9. Locate the speedmeter PC board.
See Figure F.10
10. Apply input power to the NA-5.
11. Test for AC supply to the speedmeter PC board.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

• Check for 8 to 11VAC from lead
#601 ot #602. See Figure F.10
Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate voltmeter readings. If the correct AC voltage is not present check for
loose or faulty connects with the associated leads. See wiring diagram.

12. Test for DC volts on the speedmeter PC board.
• Check for 4.75 to 5.25VDC from
TP5 to lead #510P. See Figure
F.10
Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate meter readings.
• If the display is NOT lit and the
correct DC voltage is present at
TP5 to lead #510P, the digital
meter may be faulty. Replace the
meter.
• If the AC voltage IS present at
leads #601 to #602 and the DC
voltage is missing, the speedmeter PC board may be faulty.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

TP4
TP5
602 510P
601 510

NA5 SPEED METER L6233

FIGURE F.10 SPEEDMETER PC BOARD AND TEST POINTS
NA-5

F-68

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-69

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)
13. Test Speedmeter Digital Meter
Accuracy
• Use a test meter with at least 31/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.
• Connect the + probe to TP4 and
the - probe to lead 510P. Do NOT
disconnect plug.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate meter readings.
• With the NA-5 speedmeter reading SET values of STRIKE speed,
adjust the strike wire speed control until the test meter matches
the settings in the table below.
• If the NA-5 digital speedmeter
does not match the readings, the
digital meter may befaulty.

NA-5 SET SPEED READING
(IPM)

TEST VOLTMETER READING

150 (1.50*)
300 (3.00*)

.150 +/- .004VDC
.300 +/- .004VDC

*For Hi-Speed NA-5 speedmeter (IPM X 1000).

NA-5

F-69

F-70

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-70

• If the test meter does not match
the readings, the speedmeter PC
board may be faulty.

14. Test Speedmeter PC Board
Accuracy
• Use a test meter with at least 31/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.

15. When the testing is complete close
and secure the access door.

Note: The coating will have to be
removed from the test points to ensure
accurate meter readings.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

• Connect the + probe to lead #519
(Jumper lead) and the - probe to
lead #510P. Do not
disconnect plug.

• With the NA-5 speedmeter reading SET values of STRIKE speed ,
adjust the strike wire speed control until the NA-5 speedmeter
matches the settings in the table
below.

SPEEDMETER
CALIBRATION PIN

NA-5 SET SPEED READING
(IPM)

TEST VOLTMETER
READING

21*
57F
57
95
95S
142
142T

2.07*
778
762
428
456
289
300

6.00 +/- .06
6.00 +/- .06
6.00 +/- .06
6.00 +/- .06
6.00 +/- .06
6.00 +/- .06
6.00 +/- .06

* For Hi-Speed NA-5 speedmeter (IPM X 1000)

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-71

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
PC BOARD(S) REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing and replacing the printed circuit
boards for maintenance or replacement.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 17 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
Phillips head screwdriver
5/16" Nutdriver

NA-5

F-71

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-72

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
PC BOARD(S) REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)
PROCEDURE
Before starting the following procedure,
refer
to
the
PC
Board
Troubleshooting Procedures at the
beginning of this section.

1. Remove the input power to the NA5.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board cover.
3. Carefully remove the molex type
plugs (and leads) connected to the
PC board that is to be removed.
4. Using the phillips head screwdriver,
remove the PC board mounting
screws.
5. Carefully remove the PC board.

REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

1. Using the phillips head screwdriver
and mounting screws carefully position and install the new PC board.
2. Reconnect the molex type plugs
(and leads) into the new PC board.
3. Close and secure the access door.

NA-5

F-72

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-73

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-73

DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will help the technician remove the digital meters and meter PC
boards for repair or replacement.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This meter PC Board portion of this procedure takes approximately 8 minutes to perform.
The total Meter PC Board and Meter Replacement procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16" Nutdriver
Phillips head screwdriver

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-74

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
METER PC BOARD REMOVAL
PROCEDURE
5. Carefully remove the meter PC
board.

1. Remove input power to the NA-5.
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the
control box PC board access door.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Section TOC

3. Locate and unplug the meter PC
board that is to be removed. See
Figure F.11

Return to Section TOC

F-74

Note insulation placement for reassembly. Also make sure the plug on the
back of the PC board plugs into the
prongs on the meter when you
reassemble.

4. Using the 5/16" nutdriver remove the
four PC board mounting nuts. See
Figure F.11

METER BOARD

SPEED METER BOARD

MOUNTING
NUTS

PC BOARD
PLUG PRONGS

FIGURE F.11 METER PC BOARD, MOUNTING NUTS AND PLUG
NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-75

F-75

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
DIGITAL METER REMOVAL
PROCEDURE
1. Using the phillips head screwdriver
remove the four screws from the
meter bezel. See Figure F.12
2. Carefully remove the bezel assembly.

4. Using the 5/16" nutdriver, remove
the two nuts, screws and lockwashers holding the digital meter to the
cover assembly.
5. Carefully remove the digital meter.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. Carefully remove the meter shield
assembly.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

MOUNTING
INSULATOR
DIGITAL
METER

METER SHIELD
ASSEMBLY
METER SHIELD
METER BEZEL

FIGURE F.12 METER BEZEL AND SCREW LOCATIONS

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-76

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. With the 5/16" nutdriver, fasten the
digital meter to the cover assembly
with two screws, nuts and lockwashers.

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

2. Using the phillips head screwdriver,
reattach the meter shield and bezel
assembly.

Return to Section TOC

F-76

3. Position the insulation and plug the
PC meter board into the digital
meter.
4. Mount the meter PC board using the
four nuts previously removed.
5. Reattach the molex plug.
6. Close and secure the access door.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-77

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

DESCRIPTION
The following procedure will help the technician remove the Tach PC board and related components for repair or replacement.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 9 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
5/16" Nutdriver
Slot head screwdriver
Phillips head screwdriver
3/8" Wrench

NA-5

F-77

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-78

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.
2. With the 5/16" nutdriver locate and
remove the four screws holding the
tach cover to the wire feed drive
motor. See Figure F.13

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3. Using the 5/16" nutdriver remove the
two screws from the connection box
cover.

5. Using the phillips head screwdriver,
remove the two screws from the
pick-up assembly cover . See
Figure F.14. Remove the cover.
6. Hold the nut in place with the 3/8"
wrench. With the phillips head
screwdriver, remove the locking
screw from the rotating disc. See
Figure F.15

4. Locate and disconnect the in-line
connectors from leads #510A,
#525A and #555.

TACH COVER

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

MOUNTING
SCREWS (x4)
PICKUP
ASSEMBLY
WIRE
DRIVE
MOTOR

FIGURE F.13 DRIVE MOTOR, TACH COVER, AND CONNECTION BOX

NA-5

F-78

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

F-79

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)
SCREWS

TACH ASSEMBLY
COVER

FIGURE F.14 PICK-UP ASSEMBLY AND COVER

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

7. Carefully remove the rotating disc
and tach PC board together. Note
spacer washers underneath the disc.
8. If tach PC board is to be removed
carefully remove leads from connection box and cover plate.

PHILLIPS
SCREW DISC

NUT

TACH
PC BOARD
FIGURE F.15 ROTATING DISC, NUT AND TACH BOARD
NA-5

F-79

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-80

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)
REASSEMBLY
1. Upon reassembly the spacers must
be used to assure that the disc
rotates freely and smoothly within
the sensor "window" on the printed
circuit board. Note the tach PC
board must be held in place when
aligning the rotating disc in the sensor window. Press down on the tach
PC board with your finger to simulate
the cover.
2. Use the 3/8" wrench to hold the nut
in place. Attach the rotating disc
with the phillips head screw.
3. Thread leads #510A, #525A and
#555 through the cover plate and
into the connection box. Attach to
their respective in-line connectors.
4. Replace the connection box cover.
5. Replace the pick-up assembly cover.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

6. Reattach the tach cover to the wire
feed drive motor.

NA-5

F-80

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-81

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

WARNING
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained personnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this manual.
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).

_____________________________________________________________

DESCRIPTION
This procedure will aid the technician in the removal and replacement of the drive motor to
the gear box and also associated wiring to the control box.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

This procedure takes approximately 35 minutes to perform.

MATERIALS NEEDED
7/16" Wrench
5/16" Nutdriver
Large slot head screwdriver

NA-5

F-81

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-82

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)
MOTOR REMOVAL
PROCEDURE
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.
2. Remove the motor and tach cable
from the NA-5 control box.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

3. Perform the Tach Board Removal
Procedure.

6. Using the 5/16" nutdriver remove the
clamp holding the connection box to
the drive motor.
7. Carefully remove the connection box
being careful not to stretch the leads.

4. Using the slot head screwdriver
remove the two screws mounting the
tach housing to the drive motor.
Remove the tach housing from the
drive motor.
5. Using the phillips head screwdriver
remove the cover plate adaptor.
See Figure F.16

TACH HOUSING

COVER PLATE
ADAPTER

WIRE
DRIVE
MOTOR

FIGURE F.16 DRIVE MOTOR AND TACH HOUSING
NA-5

F-82

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-83

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)
8. Remove leads #67, #627, #626,
#539 and #541 from the terminal
strip in the connector box.

11. Carefully remove the adapter plate
and motor assembly (with pinion
attached).

9. Using the 7/16" wrench, remove two
1/4-20 bolts holding the adapter
plate and motor assembly to the wire
feed gear box. (Older models may
have slot head 1/4-20 bolts). See
Figure F.17

12. With a slot head screwdriver,
remove the adapter plate from the
drive motor.

10. Using the large slot head screwdriver, remove the two slot head screws
that go through the wire feed gear
box and into the adapter plate.

ADAPTER
PLATE AND
MOTOR
ASSEMBLY

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

HEX HEAD
BOLT

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

WIRE DRIVE
GEARBOX

SLOT HEAD
SCREW
FIGURE F.17 DRIVE MOTOR
NA-5

F-83

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-84

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Attach the adapter plate to the drive
motor using the slot head screwdriver.

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

2. Carefully install the replacement
motor (with correct pinion) and
mount the adapter mounting plate
using the 1/4-20 bolts and slot head
screws previously removed.
3. Attach leads #67, #627, #626, #539
and #541 to their respective terminals in the connector box.
4. Carefully position the connector box
and clamp to the drive motor and
using the 5/16' nutdriver secure in
position. Be sure NOT to "pinch"
any leads.
5. Using the phillips head screwdriver
mount the cover plate adaptor to the
drive motor.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

6. Using the slot head screwdriver
attach the tach housing to the drive
motor.
7. Perform
the
Tach
Replacement Procedure.

Board

8. Assemble the motor and tach cables
to the NA-5 control box.

NA-5

F-84

Return to Master TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-85

TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR

F-85

RETEST AFTER REPAIR
If a failed test indicates that any mechanical part that could affect the machine's electrical characteristics must be
replaced or if any electrical components are repaired or replaced, the machine must be retested and must meet
the following standards.

Wire Feed Speed per following table:..........................
Gear Ratio

Wire Speed Range in/min (m/min)

21/1
57/1
95/1
142/1

100-2070 (2.54-52.58)
38-778 (.97-19.76)
22-456 (.56-11.58)
15-300 (.38-7.62)

LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate per PC Board LED Definitions table in
Troubleshooting Section.
Flux or Water Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate when "Start" switch is pressed.
Relay 3CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate and "close" power source contactor.
Relay 2CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate and activate external travel circuit, if used.
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Refer to Voltmeter Accuracy Test.
Wire Speed Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Refer to Wire Speed Accuracy Test.

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Voltage control and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Refer to Out of Voltage Range Shut Down Test.

NA-5

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

F-86

NOTES

NA-5

F-86

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

G-1

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

G-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
-ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS SECTION-

Electrical Diagrams ....................................................................................................................Section G
Wiring Diagram ....................................................................................................................................G-2
Logic PC Board (L6242-1) Schematic .................................................................................................G-3
Logic PC Board (L6242-2 & above) Schematic ...................................................................................G-4
Power PC Board (L6252-1) Schematic................................................................................................G-5
Power PC Board (L6252-2 & above) Schematic..................................................................................G-6
Voltage PC Board Schematic ..............................................................................................................G-7
Control Circuit Schematic ....................................................................................................................G-8
Procedure Board Schematic ................................................................................................................G-9
Option & Timer Board Schematics.....................................................................................................G-10
Meter PC Board Schematic & Layout ................................................................................................G-11
Miscellaneous PC Board Layouts ......................................................................................................G-12

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC
Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

NOTES

NA-5

564A

O

A

532

AND TAPED CONNECTION

B

25

FLUX RECEPTACLE

531

N.H

3

500

4

510
500

1

500

B

531

C

GND

2
4

4

610

B

525A

C

555

RATIO

DRIVE ROLL

PART NUMBER

WIRE SIZE

RANGE

57/1

S12778

SINGLE .035-.052

40-778 I.P.M.

57

57/1

S12515

SINGLE 1/16-3/32

38-762 I.P.M.

95

95/1

S12514

SINGLE 3/32-5/32

22-428 I.P.M.

95/1

S12515

SINGLE 1/16-3/32

23-456 I.P.M.

S13161-052

TWIN .045-.052

S13161-5/64

TWIN 1/16-5/64

95S

S14904(OUTER)
S14905(INNER)
142
142T

142/1

S12514

142/1

S14904(OUTER)
S14905(INNER)

21

21/1

31

531

87

32

626

541

539

532

515

3

500

BROWN

601

5

4

T2

-

RED

RED

510A

525A

R1

P.C. BOARD
621

667

87

625

531A

25
531

531

626

5A CIRCUIT
CB1

532

31

531

TRAVEL SW.
S2

32

R

610

532

INCH

682

586

"HOT" LIGHT

POWER SW.

6

B

4

C

5

592

3

687

2

4

563

3

628

1

520

8

510P

7
6

510P
METER
632

2

512

3

511

1
2

IT

D
A

LU

COM
E

AUTO

525

N.N.

6

500

5
VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD

5

511A

4

510P

15

586

REMOTE INTERFACE
MODULE (OPTIONAL)

11
581A

1

500

6

586

5

592

4

582

2

515

3

500
DOWN

500

582

500
S3

N.E.

B

7

STOP

RED

S6

RED
1/8 AMP FUSE

250 VAC

N.H. 531-87 115 VAC (SWITCHED) 1/2 AMP.
PROCEDURE KIT
RECEPTACLE

NOTE: NA-5 MOTORS INSULATED FOR HIGH FREQUENCY STARTING DO NOT HAVE THIS CONNECTION. REFER TO

15-300 I.P.M.

H

E

B

511

N.K. LEAD CONNECTED TO MOTOR FRAME WHICH IS ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITH ELECTRODE DRIVE ROLL AND DRIVEN ELECTRODE.

15-289 I.P.M.

S

D

BYPASS

511A

1

560

TWIN 5/64-1/8

E

F

W

9

POLARITY CONNECTIONS WHICH MATCH ELECTRODE AND WORK CABLE POLARITY CONNECTIONS TO POWER SOURCE.

SINGLE 3/32-7/32

500

688

A

532

LT1

S1

12

637

S4

UP

ELECTRODE

11

621

500

592

531A

667

510

9
14

TERMINAL
STRIP JUMPER

627

R

1

1

WHITE
592

6
5

631

J1 INPUT RECEPTACLE

500

8

525

N.D.

555

7

688
540

10

S

FUSE

3

510

531B

12

F

FAST BLOW

10

530

602

RED

BLUE

CONTROL

N.J.

GREEN

688A

592

587

689

586

528
2

3

6

6

1/ 8 AMP

8

525

500

5

BLUE BLUE

P.C. BOARD

BROWN

POLARITY

ORANGE

ORANGE

21

WORK

ELECT
67
+

528

CIRCUIT

WHITE

B
C

RF BYPASS

115VAC (SWITCHED)

2

564
583S

4

510P

N.J. CONNECT #67 BLACK (ELECTRODE) LEAD AND #21 WHITE (WORK) LEAD TO APPROPRIATE TERMINAL STRIP

TWIN
3 32
/

SINGLE .035-.052

S12778

531-25

3

621

G
H

689

A

BREAKER

57F

6

681
500

T1
532

TERMINALS

667

21

N.K.

WORK

N.G. 531-532 115VAC

682

2
4

13

689

32

F

528

D
E

528

31

500

C

TS1

500

4

500

2

B

681

A

RATED SPEED

RANGE

682

2

514

COM STOP

PIN

584C

9

516
635

START

SPEEDMETER NA-5 HEAD

POWER SOURCE

WHEN SHIPPED.

1

510A

I

WORK CABLE TO
EMPLOYED PER CHART BELOW: (CONNECTED TO PIN "95" OR "21"

1

TS2

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
N.A. SPEEDMETER BOARD CALIBRATION JUMPER IS TO BE CONNECTED FOR NA-5 HEAD AND DRIVE ROLL

610

BLACK

531B

WELDING
NOZZLE

563

N.M.

24V.

581A

563

5

4

BLUE

627
67

500

SOURCE

PICK-UP
P.C. BD.

561

9

1

5

YELLOW

D
E

531B

500

510A

555

525A

POWER

TACH.

N.R.

6

4

585

BLACK

539
626

610

67

627

626
WHITE

541

539
RED

BLACK

ELECTRODE

4

12

564A

14
564

13

9
588

563

BLUE

5

10

6

12

14

11

8
1

6

7
584C

583S

583C

8
584S

11

10
632

635

3
520

15

9

1

7

13

2

3

4
2

15

1

5
515

500

510P

10

JUMPER
PLUGS

5

6

12

11

15

8

9

7

1

2

4

14
2

3

6
560

CABLE
TO

ARM.

2

589

WHITE

601

602

510P

511

514

512

516

PROCEDURE BOARD

CONTROL

3

628

581

3

1

*

587

RED

B
C

D

TS

588
560

582

3

RED

RED

7
8

2

SWITCHES

581A

RECEPT.

CR3

3

584S

SIGNALS

500

S5

*BURNBACK

561

1

637

2

5

4

566

4

COM DOWN

2

4

3

I
O

N.P.

687
530

565

2
3

541

J2 TACH. RECEPTACLE

*

START RECEPT.

N.B.

565

515

S7

581

4

*

566

6

655

5

500

*

CRATER RECEPT.

5

581A

SET-ACTUAL

519

517

RECEPT.

13

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

I

515

655

500

O

*

WELD TIME

1

CONTACTOR

WHITE

ORANGE
ORANGE

3

RELAY MODULE

1

F

562S

655

562S

635

588A

632

584S

588

500

583S

515

510P

520

655

562C

632

562C

635

588

588A

584C

500

583C

515

510P

520

I

O

515

1

655

500

6

531B

525

9
5

CR2

1

6

688

UP

Return to Master TOC

610

610

A

START

Return to Master TOC

1

500
540

2
589

J3 MOTOR RECEPTACLE

N.C.

(BURNBACK TIME)

5

631

6
3

4

87

A

TIMER BOARD

531A

N.P.

532

WHITE

5

11

GND

A

562

510P

4

12

635

520

6
632

2
588A

7

8

3
588

584

500

9

10

1

P29 (S)

J4

531

D

2

510

YELLOW

FLUX OR WATER
SOLENOID
87

C

532

525

532

1

ELECTRODE LEAD BOLTED

587

4
8

7

1/2A SLOW BLOW

POWER FUSE

TRAVEL RECEPT.

2

531B

I

O

655

515

500

655

I
2

3

4

6

J28 (S)

515

583

J29 (S)

655

I

500
J5

O

655

515

COUPLED

OPTION BOARD
(START USE)

(OPTIONAL)
500

5

11
562

510P

12

4
635

520

6
632

2
588A

7

8

3
588

584

500

1

9

10
515

583

655

5

*

N.R.

P29 (C)

CR4

P28 (S)

WELD TIMER BOARD
J29 (C)

515

RECEPT.

1

500

4

3

601

5

602

2

510

6

519

1
601

602

510P

510

4

3

FIELD FUSE

528

MAGNETICALLY

627

602

601

519

510

510P

602

601

510P

517

510

518
1

2

5

510P

I

655

515

500

O
O

I

655

500

515
3

4

6

5

1/2A SLOW BLOW

583C

HI-FREQUENCY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR REQUIRED #67 ELECTRODE VOLTAGE SENSING LEAD CONNECTION.

N.M. NOT PRESENT ON EARLIER VOLTAGE P.C. BOARDS.

100-2070 I.P.M.

N.N. BLUE JUMPER LEAD NOT PRESENT ON EARLIER VOLTAGE P.C. BOARDS. THE JUMPER IS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE

TO DISABLE THE "COLD" STARTING FEATURE.
N.B. REMOVE START RECEPTACLE JUMPER PLUG FROM PROCEDURE BOARD TO INSTALL OPTIONAL PROCEDURE

4

635

5

520

6

632

7
8

W

9

W

10

564A

11

114A 12

N.P. EARLIER RELAYS HAD SAME TERMINAL NUMBERS BUT IN A DIFFERENT ORIENTATION.

MODULE AS START PROCEDURE CONTROL. IF MODULE IS REMOVED, REPLACE JUMPER PLUG.

3

510P

"COM" TAB, UNLESS SPECIFIED ON THE POWER SOURCE CONNECTION DIAGRAM TO BE CONNECTED TO THE "AUTO" TAB

= SINGLE "21" PIN ON HIGH SPEED BOARD ONLY.

2

500
500
515

N.L. REMOVE JUMPER PLUG TO INSTALL OPTIONAL KIT. IF KIT IS REMOVED, REPLACE JUMPER PLUG.

= EARLIER SPEEDMETER BOARDS DID NOT HAVE THESE PINS.

564

*

2

6

539

WELDING CURRENT

*

OPTION BOARD
(CRATER FILL USE)

Return to Section TOC

REED SWITCH ACTUATED BY

N.L.
1

*

57F

625

*

95S

57

TRAVEL
RELAY MODULE

5

TIMER
6

4

*

95

N.R.

J28 (C)

3

N.F.
LOGIC
P.C. BOARD

3

*

N.A.

541
627

*

VOLTMETER BOARD
TIMER

142T

CR1

1

*

TIMER BOARD
142

585

*

2

(START TIME USE)

SPEEDMETER
BOARD

2

610

*

USED FOR START CONTROL

DIGITAL METER

4

POWER P. C. BOARD

1

626

*

DIGITAL METER

TO POWER SOURCE

*

(CRATER TIME USE)

*

N.P.

532

ELECTRODE CABLE
OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE

TIMER BOARD

FILTER P.C. BOARD
LEAD PLUG

87

*

FLUX RELAY MODULE

USED FOR CRATER CONTROL

RECEPT.

OPTIONAL PULSE POWER

581A

OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE

*

Return to Master TOC

Wiring Diagram

P28 (C)

Return to Section TOC

G-2

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G 1553

Return to Section TOC

G-2

N.L.

N.R. POTENTIOMETERS AND SWITCHES MOUNTED ON P.C. BOARD ARE CONNECTED TO FRAME, FOR ESD.

N.C. REMOVE CRATER RECEPTACLE JUMPER PLUG FROM PROCEDURE BOARD TO INSTALL OPTIONAL PROCEDURE
MODULE AS CRATER PROCEDURE CONTROL AND CONNECT LOGIC BOARD LEAD #694 TO PIN #P10.

JUMPER PLUG

(NOT PRESENT ON EARLIER BOARDS)

IF MODULE IS REMOVED, REPLACE JUMPER PLUG AND LOGIC BOARD LEAD #694 TO PIN #P8.
N.D. CONTROL BOARD JUMPER LEAD CONNECTED TO PIN "F" WHEN SHIPPED. SEE OPERATING MANUAL FOR
USE OF PIN "S" JUMPER CONNECTION.
N.E. VOLTAGE BOARD RED JUMPER LEAD CONNECTED TO PIN "S" AND WHITE JUMPER LEAD CONNECTED TO

*

PIN "B" WHEN SHIPPED, FOR USE TYPICALLY WITH DC-[ ]TYPE POWER SOURCES. REFER TO CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR ALTERNATE CONNECTIONS, AND JUMPER CONNECTIONS FOR R3S, SAM AND SAF OR SA

CAVITY NUMBERING SEQUENCE

POWER SOURCES WITH K224. EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS DO NOT CONTAIN PIN "D".

(COMPONENT SIDE OF P.C. BOARD)

N.F. LOGIC BOARD DIP SWITCHES OR JUMPERS TO BE SET TO SUIT DESIRED APPLICATIONS PER CHARTS BELOW:
NA-5 SHIPPED CONNECTED FOR INDICATED METHODS OF TRAVEL & BURNBACK.

METHODS OF TRAVEL

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

FOR EARLIER LOGIC P.C.
BOARDS WITH JUMPERS

START/STOP WITH SWITCHES

START/STOP WITH WELD CURRENT

START WITH WELD CURRENT
STOP WITH STOP SWITCH
START WITH START SWITCH
STOP AFTER CRATER TIME
(OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE

CONNECT
LEAD #691 to P6
LEAD #692 to P5
CONNECT
LEAD #691 to P6
LEAD #692 to P7

CONNECT
LEAD #691 to P5
LEAD #692 to P7
CONNECT
LEAD #691 to P6
LEAD #692 to P9

FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS WITH
DIP SWITCHES
1

2

3

4

SWITCH #1
1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

1

1

3

4

2

3

SWITCH #2

1

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

SWITCH #2

1

1

INSTALLED IN CRATER RECEPTACLE)

START WITH START SWITCH
STOP AFTER BURN-BACK TIME
(OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE
INSTALLED IN CRATER RECEPTACLE)

2

3

4

SWITCH #1

2

3

WIRE FEED STOP WITH

1

4

1

4

7

1

4

7

10

1

4

7

10

13

4

2

5

2

5

8

2

5

8

11

2

5

8

11

14

3

6

3

6

9

3

6

9

12

3

6

9

12

15

J28

CONNECT

1

LEAD #693 TO P3

INCH UP WITH NO CONTACTOR
DELAY

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

SWITCH #1

SWITCH #2

1

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

USE OF OPTIONAL CRATER MODULE
CRATER BOARD INSTALLED?

FOR EARLIER LOGIC P.C.
BOARDS WITH JUMPERS

YES

CONNECT

CONNECT
LEAD #690 TO P2
LEAD #693 TO P1

FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS WITH
DIP SWITCHES
1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

LEAD #694 TO P10

LEAD #690 TO P4
LEAD #693 TO P1

J29

FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS WITH
DIP SWITCHES

LEAD #690 TO P4

CONNECT

4

SWITCH #2

3

SWITCH POSITIONS 3 AND 4 ARE NOT APPLICABLE

FOR EARLIER LOGIC P.C.
BOARDS WITH JUMPERS

INCH UP WITH CONTACTOR DELAY
CONNECT
LEAD #691 to P6
LEAD #692 to P8

1
2

SWITCH POSITION 2 IS DOWN

CONTACTOR DELAY
SWITCH #1

4

METHODS OF BURNBACK

4

SWITCH #1

3

SWITCH POSITION 1 IS UP

4

SWITCH #2

2

SAMPLE SWITCH

SWITCH #2

SWITCH #1
2

1

SWITCH #1

SWITCH #2

1

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

NO

CONNECT

SWITCH #1

SWITCH #2

1

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE
ON HOLE SIZES PER E2056
OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. AND IS
8-24-84H
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED
11-14-86L
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002
7-19-91J
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE t(" ") TO AGREE
7-10-92B
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
5-19-95D

1-12-96D
7-12-96P

EQUIP.

SWITCH #1

SWITCH #2

NA-5

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. TYPE
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF

LEAD #694 TO P8

SCALE
DR

DAD

DATE

5-8-92

WIRING DIAGRAM

SUBJECT

NONE

G 1553

SHT.
CHK

REF.

G1512

SUP'S'D'G

8-1-80

NO.

NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.
NA-5

N.D.

C705

R704

691

DOWN
C4M

D

9

+

515

X706

R714

X706
A

4

2

R715

A

3

B

PROCEDURE

11

PC BOARD

5

CURRENT

10

584S
START
TIME
INITIATE

}

592

R718

1
C712

S4
INCH
DOWN

D

2

6

688
690

P4

C5K

N.D.

C5E

2

1

X703
A

3

B

N.E.

SHUTDOWN
ENABLE

STOP
R1003

R722

D1013 +

D1012

C1003

SWITCH
D1015

D1014

24V SIG.
INCH UP

PC BOARD

X702
D

11

2
1

4
D

11

9
10

X704
C

4
8

5

X704
A

4

3
P3

X703
B

6

9
10

N.D.

5

X704
B

X703
C

8

587

12

X703
D

11

PROCEDURE
PCB

Q703

N.B. COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH
OPTIONAL LINC-FILL BYPASS KIT

C720

ENABLE

(ALSO SEE SCHEMATIC A).
N.C. LEAD 694 TO BE CONNECTED TO

500

PIN P10 IF OPTIONAL CRATER MODULE

A7H

C726

(SEE SCHEMATIC E) IS INSTALLED, OR

610

TO PIN P8 IF REMOVED.
N.D. LOGIC BOARD JUMPER LEADS ARE TO

A6G

CR1

Q706

B7J

FEED
ENABLE

S3
INCH
UP

BE CONNECTED TO SUIT APPLICATION
PER CHARTS BELOW.
N.E. HOLD-LOW DISABLE IS USED WITH
G1556-1 AND EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS.
ARC CONTROL ENABLE IS USED WITH
LATER VOLTAGE BOARDS.

LED 7G

D721
D724
585
Q705

R731

C710

INCH DOWN

SCHEMATIC) MUST BE IN "STRIKE"
POSITION TO START WELD CYCLE.

681

R723

FEED
FORWARD

DZ705

24V SIG.

D1020

N.A. S801 (SEE PROCEDURE PC BOARD

STRIKE

586

C1004

CR5

D9C

A3K

SIGNAL
COMMOM
D1019

CURRENT

500

6
LED
7E

D1018 +

SWITCH
D9C

ENABLE

D1017

CR
1004
SWITCH
COMMON

D7A

ARC CONTROL

PROCEDURE

P2

P9

X704

Q710
DZ706

CR
1004

D719

563

STRIKE PROCEDURE
DISABLE

D1016

500

LEAD TO PIN

FLUX OR
WATER

C722
500

500

A7H
WHEN OPTIONAL
PROCEDURE MODULE
IS INSTALLED IN

D9C

500

D1009

24V SIG.

CR
1003

A6G

C723

561

PROCEDURE

13

DZ704

C1002

D1011

OUTPUT

610

500

693
3

SIGNAL
COMMOM

R1004

D9C

13

X706

Q707

PC BOARD

12

X705

C

PROCEDURE

13

D9C

CRATER RECEPTACLE

NO.

METHODS OF TRAVEL

NO.

START-STOP
WITH SWITCHES
START-STOP
WITH WELD CURRENT

691
692

P6
P5

691
692

P6
P7

START WITH WELD CURRENT
STOP WITH STOP SWITCH

691
692

P5
P7

START WITH START SWITCH
STOP AFTER CRATER TIME
START WITH START SWITCH
STOP AFTER BURN-BACK TIME

691
692

P6
P9

691
692

P6
P8

LEAD TO PIN
FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS L6242-2 OR HIGHER USE G2974 SCHEMATIC FOR
COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.
LOGIC P.C. BOARD

Return to Master TOC

E

CRATER
TIME OVER
BURNBACK
TIME
INITIATE
583C

CR
1003

D7J

592

X706

6

LED 7J

C3K

500
A7H

R739

C709

D1008 +

SOURCE

Q704

D1007

CR
1002

C721

D9C

X702

D8C

DZ703

C724

CR
1002

SWITCH
COMMON

POWER

682

R725

Q708

586

LED 7K

D723

500

P1

X706

X702

515

+

R735

PC BOARD

D9C

5

R717

D717

CRATER
TIME
INITIATE

D720

HOLD-LOW
DISABLE

C708

8

12

Q701

6

CR3

500

D9C

X707
C

10
9

500

1

1

C

START

D1006

D1010

R726

R710
D9C

588

2

C2M

R716

Return to Master TOC

500

12

D9C

L701

5

8

P7

D8C

637

C

9

C4D

24V SIG.

SWITCH

ELECTRODE
HOT
R

C1001

SWITCH

D3A

A6G

LT1
530

PROCEDURE

R733

8

F

13

C729

X706

C707
500

C711

566

BURNBACK D715
TIME OVER
D716

687

582

R728

R712

D725
584C

R734

SHUT-

R711

R713

LED7D

D9C

D1004
D1003 +

R1002

A7H

D8C

F1001

D1005

500

515

D726

X705

X702

10
11
R709

12
R708

PROCEDURE
PC BOARD

D8C

592

.047
MFD

C719

610

500

CR
1001

D1A

C725

CR6

CR
1001

D1002

+

D709

X707
D

13

D8C

PRESENT

6

581A

Q702

Q709

D9C

P8

P6

D9C

D9C

PRESET
MONITOR
ENABLE

689

12

+

X701
B

4

500

500

CURRENT

A

500

515

D714

13

DZ701

STOP

528
CR4

3

N.B.

5

N.D.

X705

X701
A

PROCEDURE
PC BOARD

R729

R702

2

D9C

S6

Return to Master TOC

1

6

560

D1001

D1022

589

R720

10

500

C704

515

E

R1001

D722

D9C

REMOTE INTERFACE
OPTION

D1024

RED

LED 7H
TRAVEL

C727

X705
11 11

CR2

500

C728

R703

582

5

+

LED 7C

D710

X707
B

4
R705

PC BOARD
WELD TIME
515
OVER

N.C.

D718

D1023

RED

VAC

R730

D708

565

PROCEDURE

D8C

Return to Section TOC

X701
13
D
12

Q711

A7E

R727

692

C706

S5
START

VOLTAGE

694

P5
3

PROCEDURE
ENABLE

R721

2

24

R724

N.A.

X707
A

1

DZ702

8

D1021

A6G

PC BOARD

R737

R706

9

8

R736

S801A 581

C

10

4

R741

R740

581A

F

3

B

R742

DISABLE

X701

9

WELD

X705

R738

START

D712

P10

X705

R732

D8C

OVER

610

PROCEDURE

564

WELD TIME

470

START TIME
OVER

515

D9C

Return to Section TOC

583S

PROCEDURE
PC BOARD

OHMS

LED 7B

R707

Return to Master TOC

LOGIC PC BOARD (L6242-1) SCHEMATIC

500

Return to Section TOC

G-3

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
C706
C707
C708
C709
C710
THRU
C729
D701
THRU
D712
D714
THRU
D717
D718
THRU
D721
D722
THRU
D726

}
}
}
}
}

.22/100
500/50
4.7/35
.047/100
10/25
.047/100
10/25
10/25
10/25
.022/25

1A, 400V

1A, 400V

1A, 1000V

1A, 400V

DZ701
DZ702
DZ703
DZ704
DZ705
DZ706
L701
LED 7A
THRU
LED 7E
LED 7G
LED 7H
LED 7J
LED 7K
Q701
Q702
THRU
Q705
Q706
THRU
Q711
R701
R702
R703

16V, 1W
16V, 1W
3V, 1/2W
16V, 1W
3V, 1/2W
5.1V, 1/2W
5.6mH, 28mA

RED
LIGHT
EMITTING
DIODE
2N 4123

}
}

2N 5657

2N 4123
4.7K
4.7K
100

R704
R705
R706
R707
R708
R709
R710
R711
R712
R713
R714
R715
R716
R717
R718
R720
R721
R722
R723
R724
R725
R726
R727

FOR REMOTE INTERFACE PC. BOARDS L6580-1
OR HIGHER USE S21207 SCHEMATIC FOR
COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.
OPTIONAL REMOTE INTERFACE P.C. BOARD

47K
470
100
4.7K
47K
470
470
15K
470
4.7K
4.7K
100K
22K
4.7K
100
2.7K
1.5K
68K
2.7K
1.5K
2.7K
1.5K
68K

R728
R729
R730
R731
R732
R733
R734
R735
R736
R737
R738
R739
R740
R741
R742
X701
X702
X703
X704
X707
X705
X706
X708

2.7K
1.5K
68K
22K
47K
22K
47K
22K
47K
6.8K
47K
10K
15K
10K
15K
QUAD 2
INPUT
NAND
GATE
HEX
INVERTER
+15 V VOLTAGE
REGULATOR

C1001 THRU C1004
CR1001 THRU CR1004
D1001 THRU D1004
F1001
R1001 THRU R1004

CR1
CR2
CR3
CR4
CR5
CR6
LT1
S3
S4
S5
S6
TIC

}

}

SPST 110 VDC RELAY COIL
(N.O. CONTACTS SHOWN ON
SCHEMATIC A)
REED SWITCH ACTUATED BY
WELDING CURRENT
OPTIONAL 110 VDC RELAY
COIL ACTUATED BY CR4
OPTIONAL LINC-FILL
SOLID-STATE PILOT RELAY
INDICATOR LIGHT
SPST PUSH BUTTON SWITCH

NO.

METHODS OF BURNBACK

NO.

WIRE FEED STOP WITH
CONTACTOR DELAY

690
693

P4
P3

INCH UP WITH
CONTACTOR DELAY

690
693

P4
P1

INCH UP WITH NO
CONTACTOR DELAY

690
693

P2
P1

FOR LEAD #694 CONNECTION SEE N.C.
NA-5 SHIPPED CONNECTED FOR INDICATED
METHODS OF TRAVEL AND BURNBACK.
KEY TO SYMBOLS
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
RESISTORS = OHMS, 1 2 /WATT
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT
SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS

22V 600mA SECONDARY

(PRIMARY SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC A)

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.
NOTE:

2/50
SPDT, 24VDC
1A, 600V
1/8A FUSE
150

COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD

}
}
}

Return to Section TOC

G-3

HAVING A COMMON CODE NUMBER.

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537

1-12-96D
L6682-4

Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided
for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

LOGIC PC BOARD (L6242-2 & above) SCHEMATIC
2974

610

1

515

J1

22.1K
515

R51
PROCEDURE

D12

22.1K

J4

R52

4

PC BOARD

LED 7B

D11

START TIME

WELD TIME

OVER

OVER

J4
2

R3

1.50K

8

10

A

1

X5

2

A

1

N.A.

R6

R4

100

475

C6

S5

1
2

X7

3

3

A

16

15

1

2

N.F.

515

2N4401

.022

500

500

5

500

560

8

X7

2N4403

14

PC BOARD

100K

NOTES:

.022
50V
N.A. SWITCH (SEE PROCEDURE P.C. BOARD SCHEMATIC)

MONITOR

MUST BE IN "STRIKE" POSITION TO START WELD

ENABLE

S1 -2
3

C19

PROCEDURE

PRESET

Q18

7.68K

2N5657

2.67K

J3

C31

R53

4

B

Q2

R20

6

500

TRAVEL

1N4004

50V

100K

D13

START

LED 7H
D22
1A
400V

589

Q11

C27

S2 -1

4

B

X5

J1
4

R40
10.0K

J2

581

D18

1N4007
1A
1000V

WELD

X1

R54

DISABLE

PC BOARD

ENABLE

9

68.1K

CR2

PROCEDURE

564

PROCEDURE

1.00K

START

581A

R22

583S

R63

515

515

R2

Return to Master TOC

G-4

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
G

Return to Section TOC

G-4

N.F.

CYCLE

515
500

Q9
2N4401
13
11

B

X1

1

15

3

C

X1

2

2

Q12

16

N.C. DIP SWITCHES ARE TO BE SET TO SUIT APPLICATION
PER CHARTS BELOW

N.F.

1

515

515

50V

J5
X1

5

4

D

500

D26

N.D. HOLD-LOW DISABLE IS USED WITH G1556-1 AND

6.81K

6

EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS. ARC CONTROL ENABLE
68.1K

IS USED WITH LATER VOLTAGE BOARDS.

689

475

X5

584C
PROCEDURE

1

PC BOARD

500

R42

C8
10

50V

5

CR6

565

N.B.

PC BOARD

1N4007

1N4004

Methods of Travel
1

R25

3

10

D

X7

8

C4
.022

12

11

5

6

N.F.

50V

15.0K

1

X6

8

2

A

N.F.

9

C21
2N4403

11

X5

10

E

100K

Q13

R43

500

4

1

3

4

1

3

4

1

3

4

1

3

4

1

2

3

4

SWITCH #1

10

7

S1 -4

50V
2

3

4

current

500

ENABLE

J2

N.D.

SWITCH #1

1

ARC CONTROL

8

SWITCH #2

688

6

9

2

Start/stop with weld
SHUT DOWN

10

N.F.

7

SWITCH #2

.022
1

S1 -3

D28

3

2N5657

7.68K

TIME OVER

2

Start/stop with switches

Q4

C37

S2 -4

9

BURNBACK

R29

SOURCE
OUTPUT

2.67K

J3

566

POWER

1A
400V

500

R24

PROCEDURE

D23

1A
1000V

500

22.1K

OVER

LED 7K

D20
682

515

515

R13

100K

500

2

WELD TIME

LED 7D

C24
50V

25V

500

D8

J3

D16

CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON CODE NUMBER.
N.F. SCHEMATIC SHOWN WITH DIP SWITCHES IN THE "UP" POSITION.

J1

6

515

SHUT DOWN

DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR

2N4401

22.1K

475

.022

CR3

ENABLE

INITIATE

C11

INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS
R

LT1

Q8

.022

500

CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE

530
HOLD-LOW

CRATER TIME

475

J2
3

35V

D9

J2

1.50K

A

J4

8

D

R62

C5
4.7

D27

S6
STOP

515

X2

8

R9

100

687

11

C

9

R19

R17

R10

4

X7

12

D32

10

R56

9
13

470

D15

OHMS

22.1K
1.50K

J2

500

HOT

D25

R11
582

N.E. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED

ELECTRODE

R5

1.00K

R18

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

515

D10

.022

100K

6

LED 7C

BYPASS KIT (ALSO SEE SCHEMATIC A)

C25

2N4403

R41
7.68K

S1 -1

R27

12

R37

13

515

R55

4

515

N.B. COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH OPTIONAL LINC-FILL

C32

2

2

3

4

Start with weld current

ENABLE

Stop with stop switch
3

R12

B

X6

4

25V

100K

528
X6 C

7

1

X2

2

1

PC BOARD

X8

2

A

3

B

9

584S

J3

8

D

X6

J3
PC BOARD

J3

6

561

J3

STRIKE PROCEDURE

10

E

X2

5

4

C

22.1K

12

100K

1W

13

X2

11

D

D31

J3

R34
D17

5

X6

F

X4

4

B

Optional Crater Module Installed?
500

12

C

X4

11

5

X5

C

6

5

X3

B

X8

4

B

2

3

4

1

3

4

1

N.F.

X3

8

11

C

10

7.68K

Q15

R45

2

515

X3

A

6

R49

4

100

SWITCH #2

D

587

D6

50V

R38

R36

500

500

D5

J2

628

2

J4

7815

6

OUT

B1

.022

14

14

14

.22

22VAC

14

R1
C13
4.7

4

1

SWITCH #2

515

2

C15

X1

C16

X2
4011

C17

X3
4011

C18

X4

X5

C28

X6

4011

C29

C30

X7

X8

B2

BLU

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

SWITCH #2

GENERAL INFORMATION
500

LAST NO. USED

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537
MFD ( .022/50V

CAPACITORS =

500

RESISTORS = Ohms (
DIODES =

SUPPLY

1A, 400V

1/4W

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

LABELS

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

SUPPLY

D7

J4
5

ON HOLES SIZES PER E-2056

37

LED-

D-

35

X-

Q-

18

B-

7K

9

2

J-

5

S-

2

DZ1-

1

VOLTAGE NET

ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .O2

EARTH GROUND CONNECTION

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.

Ch'ge.Sht.No.

EQUIP.

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.

1-12-96D

SCALE
DR.

MAB

DATE

NA-5

TYPE

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .OO2
MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE

FRAME CONNECTION

FILENAME: G2974_2DA

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.

ON ALL ANGLES IS + .5 OF A DEGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS

NOTE:

63

C-

COMMON CONNECTION

7

500

LOGIC POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION AND BYPASSING

R-

POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE

500

4

50V

AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF

500

3

METHODS OF TRAVEL & BURNBACK.

THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY

3

2

UP

.022

D4

J4

500

4

500

LED 7A
D3

4011

3

FEED
ENABLE

35V
T1C

2

SWITCH #2

SWITCH #1

586

POWER

50V

100V

3

4

delay

50V

1.50K
LOGIC

500

1

3

INCH

2

C12

C1

4

SWITCH #1

J1
GND

BLU

2

1

S3

C10

(HS)
D2

3

2

NA-5 SHIPPED CONNECTED FOR INDICATED

2N4401

100K

X9
IN

D1

515

1

Inch up with no contactor

Q6

R31
22.1K

515
500

4

2N5657

R59

.022

D35

3

delay

Q5

6

C

2

1

C22

R60
X8

4

Inch up with contactor

C3

100
S4

14

OR

WATER

FEED FORWARD

11

3

14

FLUX

J5
5

R50

3

SWITCH #2

SWITCH #1

D24
1A
400V

D34

1.50K

1

Wire feed stop with

1N4004

100K

J5

2

LED 7G
585

(TO POWER P.C. BOARD)

500
X3

12

68.1K

5

1N4007
1A
1000V

2.67K

J5

3

D33

5

2

J1

D21

C34

5

1

contactor delay

2N4401

DOWN

4011

4

Methods of Burnback
CR1

2N4403

22.1K

S2 -3

INCH

50V

3

Q17

1.00K

C14

2

2N4403

R48

7.68K

9

4

12

500

515

515

Q16

R46

13

Return to Master TOC

1

No

C35

13

LED 7J

Return to Section TOC

SWITCH #2

SWITCH #1

6

515

.022

4

C36

12

35V

14

3

PCB

Yes

LED 7E
13

C9
4.7

1

14

SWITCH #1

2

50V

C23

3

47.5K

592

SWITCH #2

.022

R47

3

A

INITIATE

1

583C

50V

500

X4

2

TIME

PC BOARD

2N4401

C2

2

C20

R30

PROCEDURE

100

.022

4

1.50K

6

BURNBACK

R15

R35

3

.022

15.0K

Q1

R16

1

PRESENT

1

SWITCH #1

CRATER

VOLTAGE

563

500

TIME OVER
221K

2

515

1

D30

J5

SWITCH #2

50V

515

D29

100K

PROCEDURE

ENABLE

5.1V

515

5

PROCEDURE

2N4401

475

2.67K

563

9

STRIKE

Q10

R39

2N5657

R28

X6

DZ1

DISABLE

6
11

Q3

R23

PROCEDURE

2

SWITCH #1

Start with start switch
Stop after burn-back time
(Optional procedure
module installed in crater
receptacle)

500

PC BOARD

START
TIME

R32

3

1

681

Q14

PROCEDURE

4

Start with start switch
Stop after crater time
(Optional procedure
module installed in crater
receptacle)

J1

D19

2N4403

R44
7.68K

INITIATE

R14

Return to Master TOC

C33

PROCEDURE

CURRENT

500

Return to Section TOC

588

J3

6

1N4007
1A
1000V

R61

5

CR4

CURRENT

C26

R58

500

CURRENT

637

CR5

515

10

2

475

SWITCH #1

2N4401

22.1K
C7

515

Q7

R33

100

R57

D14

J5

LOGIC CIRCUIT

SUBJECT

NONE
9-27-94

CHK.

SUP'S'D'G.

SHT.
NO.

G 2974

Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided
for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

POWER PC BOARD (L6252-1) SCHEMATIC
G

F

WATER SOLENOID

C1105 RED

CR1

D1K

32

S1B

6682-1

L
Q102

C112

Q101

C122

Q103
C120

C111

539

FIELD SUPPLY
ARMATURE SUPPLY

TP102

4

500
A6H

GND

FEED DIRECTION CIRCUIT

10-3-81

SUP'S'D'G

D108
X101

VAC

BLK

T1A

D106

R114

GND

D107

YLW

ZERO-VOLT
REFERNCE

500
-10V

X102

10

METER

VAC

SUPPLY

YLW

T1B

LED 1B

OUT

IN

601

BLK

D111

RED

4

6

510

LED 1A

C117 +

D109

602

610
D112

RELAY

D113

ORG

POWER SUPPLY
LED 1F

115
VAC

BLK

ORG
T2A

C118
TP
103

BRN

R116

115
VAC

D114

D115
500

24

INTERFACE OPTION

VAC

7

POWER SUPPLY

FOR POWER P.C. BOARDS L6252-2 OR HIGHER USE L8956
T2B

SCHEMATIC FOR COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.

BRN

POWER P.C. BOARD

L 6682-1

C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C116
C117
C118
C119
C120
C121
C122

.005/1400
.15/200
50/250
.15/200
.047/100
.047/100
4.7/35
.047/100
.022/25
.022/25
.022/25
.022/25
.22/100
500/50
500/50
4.7/35
18/15
.02/600
.047/100
.022/25
.02/600
.022/25

D101
D102
D103
D104
THRU
D111
D112
THRU
D115

16A, 400 V
16A, 400 V
16A, 400 V

DZ101

5.1 V., 1 /2 W

F101
F102

LED 1A
THRU
LED 1F
PT101
PT102
PT103

R.F. BYPASS P.C. BOARD
Q101
Q102
Q103
QU101

2N4123
2N5816
2N5816
UJT

SCR
SCR
SCR
SCR

101
102
103
104

40, 12W
68K
100
100
10K, 2W
100
10K
47K
4.7K
6.8K
680
47K
680
4.7K
3.3K
68K

TP101
TP102
TP103

8A, 600V
8A, 600V
16A, 400V
16A, 400V

1A, 400 V

1A, 1000 V

1/ 2A SLOW BLOW,
POWER SUPPLIES FUSE
1/ 2A SLOW BLOW,
FIELD FUSE
RED LIGHT
EMITTING
DIODE
1:1:1
PULSE
TRANSFORMER

R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107
R108
R109
R110
R111
R112
R113
R114
R115
R116

X101
X102

150V, 10J

+15V VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
-5V VOLTAGE
REGULATOR

FOR R.F. BYPASS P.C. BOARDS M14133-1 OR
HIGHER USE S20995 SCHEMATIC FOR
COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.
C1101
C1102
C1103
C1104
C1105
C1106

.0047/3000

ARC VOLTAGE BY-PASS

.0047/3000

(SEE SCHEMATIC "C")
FLUX SOLENOID BY-PASS

.0047/3000

MOTOR FIELD BY-PASS

KEY TO SYMBOLS

COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD
CB1

5A. CIRCUIT BREAKER

CR1
CR2
CR3
CR6
CR7

SPST, N.O. FLUX OR WATER
SPST, N.O. TRAVEL
SPST, N.O. POWER SOURCE OUTPUT
SPST, N.O. SOLID STATE, OPTIONAL
LINC-FILL PILOT RELAY
OPTIONAL LINC-FILL BY-PASS CONTACTOR

R1

2, 50W

S1
S2

DPST, CONTROL POWER AND
EMERGENCY STOP
SPDT, TRAVEL

T1A
T1B
T1C
T2A
T2B

36 VCT, 300mA SECONDARY
10 VAC, 600mA SECONDARY
SEE LOGIC SCHEMATIC "D"
115VAC, 80mA SECONDARY
24VAC, 30mA SECONDARY

INPUT CONTROL CABLE CONNECTION
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER
SUPPLY; 510

A5H

SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
RESISTORS = OHMS, 1 2 /WATT
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS
DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON
CODE NUMBER.

A.N.S.I. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537

8993

532

D3K

DZ101

THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCECh'ge. Sht. No.
ON HOLE SIZES PER E2056
OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. AND IS
11-20-81G
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED
9-7-84A
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF
5-18-92N
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE t(" ") TO AGREE
9-11-92J
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
3-31-94E

CR3

C115 +

C113

ANALOG
POWER SUPPLY

C116

C114

WHT

18
VAC

ANALOG

8400

115
VAC

+

+

18

525
+15V

D110

GND

RED

BLK

OUT

IN
D105

FOR NA-5 CONTROL CODES

531B

5

Return to Master TOC

D6G

P.C. BOARD

1E

532

532

2

Return to Master TOC

587

FORWARD

PICK-UP

LED

F102

D104

Return to Section TOC

D102

LED
1D

R102

626

D6K

D101

TO TACH

R108

CR2

BLK

LED
1C

C103

C110

ARMATURE

FEED

WH

C1106

PT103A

D103

MOTOR FIELD

R115

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

3

HAND

D2G

MOTOR

REF.

TRAVEL

CR6

WIRE FEED
627

BLU

PT102A

CHK

TP101

S2

SCR
104

103

WIRE FEED

7-2-92

OFF

SCR

R101

87

C109

PT101C

PT101B

F101

DATE

C1104

DR DAD

C1105

C121

NONE

AUTO

C108
PT
103B

SCALE

C102

QU101

NA-5 SCHEMATIC

532

C106

SUBJECT

25

GND

666

R103

C101

A6H

541

POWER CIRCUIT

500

C105

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

87

531

+

C107

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. EQUIP.
TYPE

TRAVEL

PT101A

A6H

SCR
102

SCR
101

R111

RECEPTACLE

R109

531

C119

NO.

B2L
500

R113

C104

R106

540

FLUX OR

CR7

M

525

SHT.

631
PT

INPUT

L

R110

R1

531A

102B

115 VAC

K

A5H

531

1

2

J

H

A

E

CB1

R107

S1A

31

D

CONTROL POWER AND
EMERGENCY STOP

R112

C

B

R105

A

RECEPTACLE

Return to Section TOC

G-5

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

R104

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

G-5

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

POWER PC BOARD (L6252-2 & above) SCHEMATIC

D6

GND

IN

10 VAC

X2

5

YLW

J3
D9

6

J2

J3
6

CR3
D12
531B

ORG

BLK

610

D13

1N4007

B4

L 8956
SHT.
NO.

POWER P.C. BOARD SCHEMATIC

SUP'S'D'G.

5/12/92
DATE

K.K.

SCALE

NONE

CHK.

TYPE

NA-5,NA-5R

EARTH GROUND CONNECTION

FRAME CONNECTION

EQUIP.

SUBJECT

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
1/4W

(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

DR.
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS

MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE

Ch'ge.Sht.No.
ON HOLES SIZES PER E-2056

ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .O2

ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .OO2

ON ALL ANGLES IS + .5 OF A DEGREE

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE

NUMBER.

NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON CODE

WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY

681
-10V

J3
610

PLUG INSTALLED

510

OUT

602

SHOWN WITH JUMPER

P1

500

NA-5R OPTIONAL BURNBACK
KIT RECEPTACLE

COMMON CONNECTION

VOLTAGE NET
SUPPLY

22

24

D- 15

C-

R20

13.7K
C12
47.5K

C11
R15

9

METER
SUPPLY

J3

15V

50V

601

T1B

8

3.32K

18

1W

500

B3

YLW

2

C17

5.1V
C15

POWER SUPPLY

510

SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE

BLK

3

DZ1

100V

P1

ANALOG

N.A.

532

RED

REFERENCE

LED1B

6

525

ZERO VOLT

J3

.22

VAC

1

404

R14
35V

B2
C13

18

P1

510

D11

T1A

5

402

D5

18

WHT

2

C16
4.7

50V

VAC

115 VAC

631

J3
7

500

NOTES :

RED

CIRCUIT

525

LED1A

BLK

500

P1

4

C14

B1

D10

531B

4.75K

GND

BURNBACK KIT IS CONNECTED TO 631 AND 532.

532

J3

(HS)

45J

RECEPTACLE WHICH IS DRAWN BELOW.THE

4

OUT

D7

CR3 IS SHOWN IN THE OPTIONAL BURNBACK KIT

7815

IN

150V

531B

FOR THE NA-5R ONLY:
AND CR2 ARE REMOVED ON THE NA-5R.

FIELD DIRECTION

TP2
3

THE TRAVEL RECEPTACLE,THE TRAVEL SWITCH,

+15V
ANALOG

X1

D4

GND

2

R12
525

FIELD SUPPLY
J2

4

40V

C20

400V

R11

R7
16A

400V

R8

16A

Q3
600mA

D8

S1B

CR3

539

LED1E

D2

532

2

Return to Master TOC

D1

ARMATURE SUPPLY

J2

32

40V

133K
0.5A
125V

Q1
600mA

R18

1

626

C22

P1
RED

4

Q2
600mA
40V

R2
133K

J1

C10

40
12W

R1

250V

4

J3
587

F2

WIRE FEED

.0047
3000

HAND

MOTOR FIELD

TRAVEL

C3
50

627

CR2
S2

4

LED1D

OFF

2

LED1C

.0047
3000

0.2mH

P1

400V

J1
WHT

3

PT3

0.2mH

100V

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.

16A
AUTO

3

PT2

.047
FEED FORWARD

R22

C8

J1

33.2K

6

D3

CR6

332

BLACK

600V

1A, 400V

P1

.02

2

C9

1400V

INPUT

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537

R5
SCR4
2N6403

C21

.0047

F1

SCR3
2N6403

40V

GENERAL INFORMATION

200V
C1

600mA

MOTOR ARMATURE

R19

.15

M

1

100

0.2mH

R3

Return to Master TOC

PT3

C2

45J

666

Q9

WIRE FEED

150V

115VAC

BLUE

P1

3

PT1

RESISTORS = Ohms (

0.2mH

1

0.2mH

1.50K

2N6398

R21

SCR2

SCR1
2N6398

TP1

0.5A
125V

R10

3

PT1

CR1

2

J1
631

.0047
3000

CR7

4

100V

1

100V

10K

531A

2

.047
J2

47.5K

25

1

J2

.047

10K

5

3

QU1
2N6027

C6
C5

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

200V

M F D ( .022/50V

1

.0047
3000

R9

C4
.15

0.2mH

GND

35V

CAPACITORS =

PT2

C24

C7
4.7
500

541

87

R4

531

LABELS

2

50 WATTS

6.81K

6

4.75K

R1

SOLENOID RECEPTACLE

TRAVEL
RECEPTACLE

532

0.2mH

631

2W

531A

531

GND

100V
CB1

531

DIODES =

EMERGENCY STOP

PT1

LAST NO. USED

CONTROL POWER AND
S1A

31

.047

R-

5

C19

FLUX OR WATER

Return to Section TOC

3

100

P1

R6

540

J3

POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT

525

2 OHMS

Return to Section TOC

G-6

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

100

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

G-6

1

P1

P1

P1

500

500

500

1N4007

115

45J

C18

RELAY
POWER SUPPLY

.02
600V

R17

D15

133K

D14
1N4007

BRN

R16

ORG

BLK

133K

532

1N4007
500

J2
4

VAC

T2B

500

INTERFACE OPTION

24

POWER SUPPLY

BRN

AUSTRALIA

CANADA

FRANCE

Return to Master TOC

150V

B5

L 8956

Return to Section TOC

TP3

VAC

115 VAC

T2A

LED1F

4

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

6682-3
COM

AUTO-STOP AND

AUTO
BYPASS

525
A5H

+

3

C510

C516

SET

ACTUAL

START
RESPONSE
JUMPER

N.C.

525

688
510P
B3C

5

S7B

S7B

VOLTS

517

2

3

1

CW
CAL

R602

C604

4
R603

6

C603

DM601

B3C

IN

C

+

VOLTMETER

C602

+
C601

D603
510
B7G

601

A6E

602

A6E

R522

R524

500

D4J

A6H

+
C513

A6H

SHUTDOW CIRCUIT

D604

VOLTMETER
POWER SUPPLY

VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD

L 6682-3

.1/100
4.0/50
.47/50
.022/25
.022/25
39/20
.022/25
1.8/20
.022/25
4.7/35
27/35
4.7/35
.022/25
.47/50
39/20
.0047-.005/1400
.022/25
.022/25
.022/25
.022/25
4.7/35
.022/25
.47/50
.01/200
.022/25

D501
THRU
D522
DZ502
DZ503
DZ504
DZ505
DZ506
DZ507
L501
L502
OCI501
OCI502
Q501
Q503
Q505
Q506
Q507
Q508
X501
X502

1A, 400V
6.8V, 1 /2W
5.1V, 1/2W
20V, 1W
6.2V, 1/2W
15V, 1W
6.8V, 1/2W
33uH, 110mA
33uH, 110mA
OPTO-ISOLATOR
2N4123
2N5816
2N4123
2N4857
2N5816
2N5816
QUAD OP-AMP
QUAD OP-AMP

VOLTMETER P.C. BOARD
R501
R502
R503
R504
R505
R506
R507
R508
R509
R510
R511
R512
R513
R514
R515
R516
R517
R518
R519
R520
R521
R522
R523
R524
R525

44.2K, 1/4W, 1%
500 TRIMMER
4.75K, 1/4W, 1%
100K
27K
15K
10K
2.2K
2.7K
4.7K
100K
1K
2.7K
2K TRIMMER
5.6K
100K
1K
100K
39K
15K
56K
330K
22K
27K
3.3K

R526
R527
R528
R529
R530
R531
R532
R533
R534
R535
R536
R537
R538
R539
R540
R541
R542
R543
R544
R545
R546
R547
R548
R549

47K
47K
22K
22K
27K
100K
27K
10K
100
1K
10K
33K
56K
27K
5K TRIMMER
1K, 12W
470
68K
15K
15K
270
270
100
270

F501
SBS501
T501
TP501

1 /8 AMP FAST
BLOW FUSE
SILICON BILATERAL
SWITCH
24 VAC, 185 mf
SECONDARY
150V, 10J

C601
C602
C603
C604
D601
D602
D603
D604

REF.

SUP'S'D'G

10-5-81

VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

CHK

C528

7

C501
C504
C505
C506
C507
C508
C509
C510
C511
C512
C513
C514
C516
C517
C518
C519
C520
C521
C522
C523
C524
C525
C526
C527
C528

SUBJECT

Q503

500

ENABLE

D602
D601

A

688

C522

SHUTDOWN

INSTALLED.)

GND
E

518

510P

OUT

DZ502

R530

11

BOARD (SHOWN WITH JUMPER PLUG

X601

2

7
X502

D509

OPTIONAL PULSED POWER FILTER P. C.

+5V

1
TP4

-

6

VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD RECEPTACLE FOR

TP5

D518

4
+
C

R525
D511

4

ENABLE

5

(WHITE)

ARC CONTROL

SET-ACTUAL

D507

R601

SET VOLTAGE
BUFFER

501

D510

A5H

D4J

D4B

SBS

500/50
4.7/35
.022/25
.022/25

COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD
DM601

DIGITAL METER

S7B

SPDT, VOLTS SET-ACTUAL

SUPPLY 510

NOTES:
N.A. THESE CAPACITORS ARE LOCATED
24.3K, 1/4W, 1%
2K TRIMMER
2.80K, 1/4W, 1%

X601

+5V VOLTAGE REGULATOR

FOR VOLTMETER P.C. BOARDS

ON THE R.F. BYPASS BOARD.
(SEE SCHEMATIC A).

A5H

HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER

N.B. SEE L6682-3A SCHEMATIC FOR
SUPERSEDED G1556-1 VOLAGE
BOARD.
N.C. EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS DO

L6685-1 OR HIGHER USE S21143

NOT HAVE THIS RECEPTACLE, AND

SCHEMATIC FOR COMPONENT

LEAD 688A WAS 688.

VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.

INPUT CONTROL CABLE CONNECTION
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER

SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE

1A, 400V

R601
R602
R603

KEY TO SYMBOLS

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
RESISTORS = OHMS, 1 2 /WATT
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS
DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON
CODE NUMBER.

A.N.S.I. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537

8993

+

688A

N.B.

E2E

R546

687

R531

C

SETTING

A6H

514

SHUTDOWN

C511

R549

635

1

D508

PIN
D

R523

PROCEDURE

-

VOLTAGE

500

X501

PIN
B

R520

AND

516

2

OPTION

PIN
A

R521

4

FROM

7-2-92

D9C

DATE

500

CIRCUIT

NO.

SHT.

R528

R536

AUTO-STOP

B3C

TAB JUMPER (BLUE)

D514 +

NA-5 SCHEMATIC

R545
C527

SHUTDOWN BYPASS

R519

C512 +

L

R526

R544
5

DR DAD

D514

592
D7A

R517

C517 +

4

510P

R511

HOLD - LOW CIRCUIT

Q507

NONE

0CI502

2

6

SCALE

D513

B3C

EQUIP.

1

D512

B3C

ACTUAL VOLTAGE
METER FILTER

C525

A5H

510P

P.C. BOARD

Return to Master TOC

CW

525

510P

510

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

D504

CONTROL INTERFACE

R529

Q506

CW

R548

X501

GAIN

D5A

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. TYPE

C504

D505

C505

D501

C523

7

D
+

START

D522

D521

POWER SOURCE

637
Q508

C526

11-17-95G

R547

D517

A5D

507
X502

+

C

DZ

-

THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCECh'ge. Sht. No.
ON HOLE SIZES PER E2056
OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. AND IS
9-27-85E
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED
11-14-86L
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF
3-6-92B
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE t(" ") TO AGREE
7-10-92A
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
3-25-94

+

Q501

X502

506

D515
14

D

9147

D503

+

10

-

9

13

DZ

8400

B

D506

532
DZ
504

24
VAC

115
VAC

R527
+

FOR NA-5 CONTROL CODES

8

-

6
5

X501

-

1

AMP

DZ
503

8

B

X502

R508

3

9

+

+

CONTROL

D516

A5H

R537

R504

B3C

+

4

12

R543

3

10

C509

D520

T501

R542

R506

C506

A6H

510P

-

6

2

R513

R507

A5D

C518

R538

2

D502

500

D519
531B

R540

R503

C521

B

R512

11

R534
5

OCI501

C508

A

ACTUAL VOLTAGE
BUFFER

A5H

1

R514

+

R535

R509

R515

12

+

PIN S

14

A

525
R510

4

-

C501

F501

621

13

CW
C519

-

A6H

PIN F

RESPONSE
JUMPER
(RED)

R532

501

A

C507

WELD

500

R505

ARC
VOLTAGE
POLARITY

TP

+ C524

R518

C520
R501

C1102

M

L
A5H

R533

R516

667

L502

Return to Master TOC

K
R541

A5H

525

Return to Section TOC

J

H

525

R539

N.A.

1

2

Return to Master TOC

G

525
L501

C1101

Return to Section TOC

F

C

E

D

C

B

A

R502

Return to Master TOC

VOLTAGE PC BOARD SCHEMATIC

TERMINALS

Return to Section TOC

G-7

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

+

Return to Section TOC

G-7

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

G-8

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

A

C

B

D

E

G

F

J

H

K

B

CONTROL CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC
M

L

L
628
D8A

QU201
Q205

Q206

B3G

DM401

TP4

6

X401

2

OUT

E

+

+

C402

C401

R410

7

D403

510P

510

B3C

C7E

601

A6E

602

A6E

L 6682-2

D201
THRU
D206
D208

.022/25
.022/25
18/15
4.7/35
.0033/200
.47/50
18/15
4/50
.047/100
4.7/35
.15/200
.022/25
.022/25
4.7/35
18/15
100pf/100

DZ201
DZ202
DZ203

6.8 V., 1 2/ W.
16.0 V., 1 W.
3.0 V., 1 W.

L201
L202

330 uH, 110mA

Q201
Q202
Q203
Q204
Q205
Q206
Q207

2N4123
2N4123
2N4123
2N4125
BS170
2N4123
2N5816

QU201

2N6027

.022/25

1A, 400 V

X201
X202
X203
X204

VOLTAGE REGULATOR
F- TO -V CONVERTER
QUAD OP-AMP
QUAD OP-AMP

TACHOMETER P.C. BOARD
R201
R203
R204
R205
R206
R207
R208
R209
R210
R211
R212
R213
R214
R215
R216
R217
R218
R219
R220
R221
R222
R223
R224
R225
R226

1K
500 TRIMMER
1.00K, 1/4W, 1%
2.94K, 1.4W, 1%
15K
10K
100K TRIMMER
33K
10K
270
15K
47K
15K
100K
1K
1K
1K
33K
50K TRIMMER
15K
10K TRIMMER
33K
100K
1K
10K

R227
R228
R229
R230
R231
R232
R233
R234
R235
R236
R237
R238
R239
R240
R241
R242
R243

6.8K
10K
20K TRIMMER
27K
15
100
6.8K
2.7K
10K
15K
10K
1M
15K
5.6K
15K
270
10

OCI301

OPTO-INTERRUPTER

D404

D201

Q301

2N4123

R301
R302
R304

1K
15K
1.3K

C226

EQUIP.

R237

DZ202

D203

C222

500
FEED

586

A6H

ENABLE

SPEEDMETER P.C. BOARD
C401
C402
C403
THRU
C409
D401
D402
D403
D404
X401
R401
R402
R403
R404
R405
R406
R407
R408
R409
R410
R411
R412
R413
R414

DZ201
Q202

D7J

POWER SUPPLY

C201
C202
C203
C204
C205
C206
C207
C208
C209
C210
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
C216
C217
THRU
C229

10-4-81

A5H

ACC

C207

SPEEDMETER

SPEEDMETER

525

+

D402

D401
C

S

D202

IN

GND
C403

Q201

D204

X204

PIN

F

8

B
+

R224

4

R215

C404

PIN

-

CW

B3G

R213

C405

X203

A5H

R241
TP5
1 +5V

CAL

9
10

525

511

CW
CAL

+

FAST-SLOW
ACCELER
JUMPER

8

C

R223

R402

R405

R407
C406

CW
CAL

R404

C407

CW
CAL

-

500/50
4.7/35
.022/25

COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD
DIGITAL METER

DM401
S7A

SPDT SPEED SET-ACTUAL

FEED ENABLE CIRCUIT

KEY TO SYMBOLS
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER
SUPPLY; 510

A5H

SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE

1A, 400V

HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER

+5V VOLTAGE REGULATOR
2K TRIMMER
17.8K, 1/4W, 1%
2.80K, 1/4W, 1%
2K TRIMMER
18.2K, 1/4W, 1%
5K TRIMMER
33.2K, 1/4W, 1%
5K TRIMMER
52.3K 1/4W, 1%
10
5K TRIMMER
31.6K, 1/4W, 1%
5K TRIMMER
51.1K, 1/4W, 1%

ACCELERATION CIRCUIT

SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER
NOTES:
N.A. 511 IS CONNECTED TO 511A
BY CONNECTION TO
VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD.
N.B. THESE COMPONENTS ARE
LOCATED ON POWER P.C.
BOARD (SEE SCHEMATIC A).

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
RESISTORS = OHMS, 1 2 /WATT
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS
DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON
CODE NUMBER.

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537.

9338

9

R219

R240
B1G

R225

512

57F

CONTROL P.C. BOARD

Return to Master TOC

R214

R212
SPEEDMETER
CALIBRATION
JUMPER

57

R406

C408

R408

R411

CW
CAL

R234

ACTUAL

R403

Return to Master TOC

95

R409

R412

R414
R413

CW
CAL

C409

Return to Section TOC

ARMATURE FIRING CIRCUIT

10

CW

N.B

A6H

SET-ACTUAL

519

Return to Section TOC

500

N.A.

SPEED

510A

142

PT
101A

B1G

SET

S7A

5

C228

SET SPEED BUFFER

512

511
L202

95S

R218

C213

B3C

PICK-UP

142T

R242

C215

510P

P.C. BOARD

4

14

C227

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

E2D

B
+

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. TYPE

+

555

TO TACH

A6H

12

SETTING

C119

THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCECh'ge. Sht. No.
ON HOLE SIZES PER E2056
OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. AND IS
11-9-90D
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED
7-19-91J
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF
3-6-92B
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE t(" ") TO AGREE
5-15-92N
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
7-10-92A

L201

500

632

511A

511 B5J

R220

A5H

-

A1H

R216

525A

13

SPEED

C211

R232

FROM OPTION
AND
PROCEDURE
PC BOARD

525

+

B4E

X203

540

D205
R227

3

C214

C223

D208

511

510P

R228

TACH SIGNAL CONVERTER

A5H

R401

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

C225

REF.

ACTUAL SPEED BUFFER

CHK

C220

7-2-92

DZ203

DATE

Q203

SUP'S'D'G

R231

NO.

SHT.

R233

R235

R239

R230

C229

Q204

HI

DR DAD

+

C210

CONTROL CIRCUIT

1
11

NA-5 SCHEMATIC

+

C224
X204

NONE

A

R229

R238

3
CW

A6H

C206 +

SUPPLY

7
X203

CONTROL
AMP

500

CAL

+

4

-

2

D

SCALE

5
C212

-

SUBJECT

CW
C205

6

9147

C216

R217

FOR NA-5 CONTROL CODES

R206

R205

4

3

2

REFERENCE
510

5

11

C218
12

+10.00 V

+

C208

B4J

R211

LO

R236

1

C203
13

X202

1

CW

D206

R226

11

+

A

3

R221

B4E

4 X203

-

2

10

R210

C202

8

9

R208

R203

4

7

512

A5H

X201

C201

C221

525

3

5

2

C219
C209

R222

2

R204

+

C217

R243

R207

6

C204

520
+10.00V

Q207

11 12 10

R209

A5H

1

6682-2

525

R201

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

G-8

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

655

500

584

N.B.

565

2

584C

7

588

9

583S

1

WELD TIME OVER

J19

CRATER TIME INITIATE

J19

CURRENT

J19

START TIME OVER/WELD TIME INITIATE

J19

CRATER TIME OVER/BURNBACK TIME INITIATE

J18

BURNBACK TIME OVER

510P

520

1

2

3

515

562

588A

588

635

9

11

562

500

655

632

O

583C

6

566

3

655

3

4

500

J11

4

J11

8

6

J11

J11

9

J11

11

J11

13

12

J11

J11

14

J11

15

J11

1

J11

2

J9

3

J9

4

5

J9

J9

7

6

J9

J9

J10

J10

J10

4

J10

6

J10

8

J10

J10

J10

J10

13

12

J10

J10

14

15

J10

1

J10

2

J8

J8

J8

5

J8

6

J8

J8

520

515

500

515

500

520

515

500

515

500

+10V

+5V

-10V

+5V

-10V

+10V

+5V

-10V

+5V

-10V

L 8754
SHT.
NO.

NA-5 PROCEDURE

EARTH GROUND CONNECTION

TYPE

EQUIP.

SUBJECT

1.6384 MHz
TEST POINT

OUTPUT
16

1

Q12

Vdd

2

Q13

OUT2

3

Q14

Q8

14

4

Q6

Q9

13

5

Q5

Q10

15

6

Q7

OUT1

10

7

Q4

CLK

11

Vss

RES

12

C3
47p

R19

+10V

500

N.E.

2.21K

-10V

LED2

WELD

600mA

CW

D7

STRIKE

D8

CW

10K
2W

R2
D6

PCB

13

563

J19

ENABLE

8

X1 A

9

3

X1 B

4

10K
2W

N.E.
6

CW

N.E.

CW

10K
2W

40V

VOLTS

WELD

14

564

J19

564A
581

X1 C

10

2

1

D X1

2W

N.E.
12

WELD
VOLTS

10K

N.E.

13

47.5K

26.7K

R12

1.82K

R9

267

R16

26.7K

332

1.82K

D11

WELD MODE SETTINGS

WELD PROCEDURE ENABLE

515
+5V

N.D.

RECEPTACLE

11

SPEED

5

STRIKE MODE SETTINGS

PROCEDURE KIT

R10

R7
Q2
600mA

STRIKE

R18

R3

47.5K

R15

D10

STRIKE PROCEDURE

5.62K

D9

R14

DISABLE

R17

R1
Q1

CRATER

SPEED
STRIKE PROCEDURE

5.62K

4.75K

40V

J18

C7
4.75K

D4

D3

START

D5

5.62K

R11

STRIKE

LED4

5.62K

R8

D2

D1

LED3

R4

C6

R13
LED1

7-12-96N

520

100V

WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS

100V

7-10-92N

+5V

MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE

1.6384MHz

ON HOLES SIZES PER E-2056

22p

ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .O2

C2

DIGITAL TIMERS

LOGIC

VOLTAGE BUFFER

C9

515

3-6-92B

Y1

FOR

1

ON CONTROL PCB
TO SET

J19

ON VOLTAGE PCB

TIME BASE

561

11

635

SPEED BUFFER

Ch'ge.Sht.No.

7.68K

632

ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .OO2

1/2W

10

ON ALL ANGLES IS + .5 OF A DEGREE

10M

MC14060

FRAME

TO SET

J19
R20

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE

X2

9

R6

8

520
J19

WELD PROCEDURE ENABLE

J18

START DISABLE

4

4

+10V

NOTES :

WELD

START

16

STRIKE

8

9

10

11

STRIKE

S1 A

L 8754

Return to Master TOC

515

100 Hz
TIME BASE

Return to Section TOC

I

DR.

PCB

START TIME INITIATE

J18

3

2

J11

R21

Return to Master TOC

1

J11

J19

583
N.C.

7

8

12

SUP'S'D'G.
515

I

CHK.

O

10-29-91

632

FM

655

NONE

500

SCALE

562

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

635

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.

588

FILE: L8754_3DB

588A

(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

562

1A, 400V

515

DIODES =

520

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

510P

583

1/4W

TIMER BOARD

2

RESISTORS = Ohms (

OPTION BOARD
TIMER BOARD

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

OPTION BOARD

15V
J19

M F D ( .022/50V

18

584

Return to Master TOC

O

CAPACITORS =

C1

510P

Return to Section TOC

I

520

VOLTAGE ON

LOGIC

515

+10V

FROM REF

584S

655

FRAME CONNECTION

500

COMMON CONNECTION

O

9

TIMER BOARD

I

DATE

J19

515

SCHEMATIC

-10V

655

LABELS

500

VOLTAGE NET

TIMER BOARD

500

SUPPLY

3

J19

GENERAL INFORMATION

ON LOGIC PCB

21

520

SUPPLIES

R-

15

515
+5V

POWER

D-

500

BURNBACK TIMER

C-

5

OPTIONAL
CRATER MODULE

LAST NO. USED

J19

515

OPTIONAL
WELD TIMER MODULE

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537

FROM LOGIC

OPTIONAL
START MODULE

POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT

PROCEDURE PC BOARD SCHEMATIC

CONTROL PCB

Return to Section TOC

G-9

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

R5

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

G-9

2

3

4

5

CRATER

S1 B

581A

5

560

6

J18

START DISABLE

J18

PRESET MONITOR ENABLE

C2

D12

PRESET MODE
SELECTOR

NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON CODE

C4

X2

N.E.

C8
4.7

MC14060

4066B

C1

SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE
WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY

C5

X1

LOGIC
PCB

N.A.

14

35V

NUMBER.
N.B.

A JUMPER PLUG CONNECTS 584S TO 583S WHEN THE OPTIONAL START MODULE IS

N.C.

A JUMPER PLUG CONNECTS 584C TO 583C WHEN THE OPTIONAL START MODULE IS

NOT INSTALLED.
NOT INSTALLED. ALSO, LOGIC CIRCUIT 694 LEAD MUST BE MOVED FROM PIN P10

8

TO PIN P8.

7

N.D.

564 IS CONNECTED TO 564A BY A LEAD RECEPTACLE JUMPER PLUG, WHICH IS
REMOVED WHEN THE OPTIONAL MULTI-PROCEDURE KIT IS INSTALLED.

N.E.

POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
AND BYPASSING

500

R2, R5, R8, R11 AND S1 ARE CONNECTED TO FRAME BY PCB TRACES AND MOUNTING
SCREW, FOR ESD.

-10V

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

OPTION & TIMER PC BOARD SCHEMATICS

5

9

B
6

8

2

VOLTS

14

515

DP1

DP4

11

5

2

R011

Return to Master TOC

D8C

Q002

B3C

PROCEDURE
ENABLE

500

OPTION BOARD

0

DP1

DP4

11

5

2

515

INH

1

4

3

MR 10
DP3
14

DP2

DP1

11

5

15

Q4

9

Q3

E

7

Q2

Q1

C

13

0
X905

515
D8C

INH

6
12
4

MR 10

DP4
2

DP2

DP1

11

5

DP3
14

D8C

500

500

500

D9C

D9C

D9C

S901A

D9C

S901B

S901C
LEAST SIGNIFICANT DIGIT

MOST SIGNIFICANT DIGIT

FROM

6682-5

L
SHT.

NO.

D9C

12

655

PROCEDURE
R914
C907
PC BOARD 100 HZ TIME
BASE OUTPUT
500
D9C

10-2-81

C

CIRCUIT

Q1

X904

DP2

D8C

Q2

510P
562

3

515

14

Q3

CF

4

INH

MR 10
DP3

Q4

PE

SUP'S'D'G

DP2

13

D902
500

N.C.

6

REF.

X001
3

0

12

7

CHK

A

C

9

7-2-92

4

Q1

15

NONE

R009

CW

CW
X001

Q2

X903

4

MR 10
DP3

Q3

CF

3

DATE

SPEED

DP4

Q4

PE

6

OVER

SCALE

Q001

10

C4A

B3F

13

1

7

R916

4

DR DAD

D

B

NA-5 SCHEMATIC

9

635

INH

12

9

O

X901

EQUIP.

R007

8

0
X902

632

C

15

R910

11

Q1

3

R911

C

Q2

CF

6

R912

12

Q3

1

7

R913

13

9

R906

R012

Q4

PE

B1C

C002

R008

588
CURRENT

R010

2

13

15

R907

500

X002

D8C

520

1
3

R908

D004

X002

5

10

R909

515

D9C

A

D901

6

588A

R902

3

D003
R018

R004

2

D9C

9

D8C

X901

D9C

R005

R014

INITIATE

X002
B

8

INITIATE

500

D8C

500
1

R901

R006

584

515

C004

I

OVER

D002

515

TIMER BOARD

R903

R015

D8C

TIME

R905

4

583

R001

5

515

R017

R002

OVER

X002
A

R003

1

6

M

L

K

SUBJECT

D001

R016

J

H

R915

0

G

515
D8C

D8C

CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

F

E

D

515

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. TYPE

C

B

R904

A

TIME

Return to Section TOC

G-10

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

R013

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

G-10

4

8
520

C902
THRU
C906
C907

515
14

B1C

D8C

Return to Master TOC

L 6682-5

Return to Section TOC

X001
510P

9

C001

D901
D902

14
X002

1 2 10 7 1112 13

500

B3C

C003

7

D9C

515

N.C.

D6C

500
D9C

C902

1 2 7 12 13

16

16

14
X901

X902
C903

8

C904

16

X903

X904

8

8

POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION AND BYPASSING

16
X905
C906

8

R901
THRU
R915
R916
X901
X902
THRU
X904
X905
X906

.022/25
100pf/100
1A, 400
1A, 400

22K, 1/4W
1K
QUAD 2-INPUT NAND GATE
PROGRAMMABLE
DIVIDE-BY-N
COUNTER
3 DIGIT BCD THUMBWHEEL
SWITCH

C001
THRU
C004
R001
R002
R003
R004
R005
R006
R007
R008
R009
R010
R011
R012
THRU
R016
R017
R018

.022/25

5.6K
10K, 2W MULTI-TURN POT
330
5.6K
10K, 2W MULTI-TURN POT
1.8K
4.7K
47K
27K
22K
47K
22K, 1/4W
1K
1K

SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER

OPTION P.C. BOARD

TIMER P.C. BOARD

KEY TO SYMBOLS
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER SUPPLY

Q001
Q002

2N 4125
2N 4123

X001

QUAD ANALOG
SWITCH
QUAD 2 INPUT
NAND GATE

X002

D001
THRU
D004

1A, 400V

VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER
N.C. X905 AND C906 ARE USED ONLY ON 100 SECOND
TIMER BOARDS. BOARD JUMPER IS USED ON 10
SECOND TIMER BOARDS.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
RESISTORS = OHMS, 1 2 /WATT
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON A PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF A COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT
SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS
HAVING A COMMON CODE NUMBER.

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537

8993

FOR OPTION P.C. BOARD L6246-2
OR HIGHER USE M16795 SCHEMATIC
FOR COMPONENT VALUES AND
CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.

8400

7

THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCECh'ge. Sht. No.
ON HOLE SIZES PER E2056
OWNED BY THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO. AND IS
9-7-84A
ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS .02
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED
1-31-86A
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS .002
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF
7-11-86D
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF A DEGREE
MATERIAL TOLERANCE t(" ") TO AGREE
3-6-92B
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.
7-10-92A

6

FOR NA-5 CONTROL CODES

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

5

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

Return to Master TOC

METER PC BOARD SCHEMATIC & LAYOUT
514

515

511

512

SET

ACTUAL

516

510A

513

510B

WIRE
SPEED

VOLTS

TO DIGITAL METER
562

518

517

518

510

510C

B5

B6

B2

B3

6

510C

4

10

10 VAC

+5V

510

E

4

3

+5V
2

C
8

B

1

2

1

5

D

7

9

602

5

601

B4
J14

Return to Master TOC

TP4
3

A

J14

J14

J14

J14

J14

J14

J14

J14

B1

J14

R1

D1
24.3K

D5
TP5

C4
CW

R2

D2
X1

2K

OUT

C2

IN

C1
500

4.7

50V

35V

D3

GND

C3
TP4

R3

Return to Section TOC

G-11

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

S 21143

Return to Section TOC

G-11

2.8K

D4

NOTES :
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON
MAY CHANGE

THE INTERCHANGEABILITY

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

CIRCUIT BOARD

THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT
OR CIRCUITRY OF

FILE: S21143_1CA

LABELS

GENERAL INFORMATION
N.A.

A PRINTED
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537

WITHOUT AFFECTING

OF A COMPLETE

BOARD.

SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS

CONTROLS HAVING A COMMON

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE

CODE NUMBER.

Ch'ge.Sht.No.

ON HOLES SIZES PER E-2056

3-25-94

ON 2 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .O2
ON 3 PLACE DECIMALS IS + .OO2

CAPACITORS =

M F D ( .022/50V

RESISTORS = Ohms (
DIODES =

1A, 400V

1/4W

SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

EARTH GROUND CONNECTION

(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

COMMON CONNECTION

THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.

ON ALL ANGLES IS + .5 OF A DEGREE

SCALE

MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS

DR.

517

FM

DATE

EQUIP.

CHK.

LN-9, LN-9F, NA-5

TYPE
SUBJECT

NONE

9-23-93

ITEM

R1

FRAME CONNECTION

VOLTAGE NET

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

METER BOARD SCHEMATIC

SUP'S'D'G.

REQ'D

SHT.
NO.

S 21143

PART NO.

IDENTIFICATION

C4

R2
R3
C3

601
510C

518

Return to Master TOC

Return to Section TOC

510

602

J14

C2
D2

D4

D1

D3

L6685-1

METER

D5

X1

C1

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5

LOGIC BOARD

POWER BOARD
IDENTIFICATION

ITEM

D10

D12

DZ1

J5

C32

D17

R41

Q12

C9

Q10
C23

R43

X8

C1
R1

C19

R63

Q2

C31
R53

X9

R20

C22

D22

R22

D19

Q17

R28

D18

R4

D24

C4

C9

R3

PT2

C2

PT3

D21

D23

D20

J1

LED 7A
Q18

C30

C20

R30

R51

C33

R61

R27

J4

R57
R44

Q14

C21

R62

J3

Q7
C37

R25
R56

R1

SCR2

C21

SCR1

R21

C10

C12

R19

R60

QU1

Q9
Q5

LED 7K

LED 7G

D6

R22

C24

R20

R6

R10

R14

C8

C16

D10

D8

X1

B3

C11

C26

Q13

Q4

R58

D26

R37

J2

C15

C14

B2

Q3
R12

R52

R39
R33

R23

C7

LED1A

R40

Q11

X4

C4

R48

D9

D32

D13
C24

D25

C13

B1

L6252-2

R18

R55
C25

Q3

R11

X1

R54

C36

D3

D2

D1

B5

D5

X5

C27

X3

C5

R24

Q9

C22

C14

D8

R19

R42

Q2

C18
D16
D27

Q8

R7

R16

C16

C6

J3

Q1

R15
R34

X2

D15

R8

D30

Q1

R11

R3

R2

LED1E

D11

B4

X2

C2
X6

X7

R4

R6

R9

D35

R31

C15

C17

D7

C20

R36

R59

C28

R5
R17

D4

C3

R50

D31

R5

Return to Master TOC

D14
R32

SCR4

D6

LED 7J

R38
R35

R10

D33

C10

C11

C29

IDENTIFICATION

R49

R13

D28

R12

+

J1

C7

D9

DZ1

LED 7H

C13

D3

D7

D5

S2
D1

S1

D2

R9

D4
C8

+

Return to Section TOC

C34

LED 7D

LED 7C

FIELD

C17

Q16

LED 7E

R29

F2

C19

1 2 AMP

LED1C

LED1D

C1

SLOW BLOW

R2

R18

D11

C5

R15

D14

C6

PT1

R16

TP1

D34

L6242-2

R17

D15

Q15

LED 7B

LED1B

C18

TP3

D13

PART NO.

R46

Q6

TP2

J2

F1

SLOW

POWER

1 2 AMP

NA-5 LOGIC

LED1F
D12

REQ'D

C35

R47

C3

SCR3

R14

PART NO.

R45

REQ'D

D29

ITEM

BLOW

Return to Master TOC

G-12

ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

MISCELLANEOUS PC BOARDS

NA-5 POWER

Return to Section TOC

G-12

C12
B2

B1

CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS
RESISTORES = OHMS

J18

R21

R20

C4

C2

Y1

10 9

B3

CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS

626
531

Return to Master TOC

B7

1

8

87

C1

1

Return to Section TOC

667

FRAME

B2

5

6

D12

12

7

1

S1

C8

X2

3

4

2

G1566-3

D10

B1

DESCRIPTION

C2

621

D11
D5

C3

B1

R18

C3

GND

Q1
D9

D1

D2

D3

D4

1DEL

2DEL

3DEL

4DEL

D6

PART NO.

C4

C7

R14

D7

REQ'D

Q2

C6

D8

C5

RF BYPASS

J19

R15

J11

R13

X1
J10

R17

C9

CRATER

WELD

PROCEDURE

C1

START

J9

R16

R19

J8

ITEM

B4

C5

BURNBACK

C6

M14133-1

R2

R6

R4

R3

R1

R12

R10

R5

R9

R8

R7

R11

B5

B6

Return to Master TOC

BYPASS BOARD

627

Return to Section TOC

PROCEDURE BOARD

NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.

NA-5



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 2.1 for Power Macintosh
Create Date                     : 1997:09:15 11:41:03Z
Modify Date                     : 2009:11:05 13:29:46-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:11:05 13:29:46-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:4c56c3e5-8a20-47f5-9c4a-ba6abfee5a29
Instance ID                     : uuid:ff3dae12-483f-4602-893e-017acf0de6cb
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : svm131a.pdf
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Count                      : 152
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu